Lexus Owners Manual Pdf OM48D65U

User Manual: Lexus Owners Manual Pdf 2015 Lexus RX 350 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 886

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.

Maintenance
and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

When trouble
arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.

Vehicle
specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt, SRS
airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
•
•
•
•
1

Navigation system
Air conditioning controls
Windshield wiper de-icer
Rear view monitor system

Before driving

1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................................... 30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart access system with
push-button start .......................... 35
Wireless remote control .............. 49
Side doors .......................................... 52
Back door........................................... 56

• Intuitive parking assist
• Audio/video system
• Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogging
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................................ 98
Moon roof ......................................... 101
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......... 105
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system........ 110
Alarm.................................................... 112
Theft prevention labels ................. 116
1-7. Safety information

1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 68
Rear seats........................................... 72
Driving position memory................ 76
Head restraints.................................. 81
Seat belts ........................................... 83
Steering wheel................................. 90
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror...................................... 92
Outside rear view mirrors........... 95
2

Correct driving posture ............... 117
SRS airbags ....................................... 119
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 132
Child restraint systems ............... 137
Installing child restraints............... 141

When driving

2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 154
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 165
Automatic transmission
(6-speed models) ........................ 171
Automatic transmission
(8-speed models) ...................... 178
Turn signal lever ............................ 187
Parking brake ................................. 189
Horn.................................................... 190
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ....................... 191
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 194
Multi-information display......... 200
Head-up display ........................... 206
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch.............................. 211
Fog light switch .............................. 215
Windshield wipers and
washer.............................................. 217
Rear window wiper and
washer............................................ 224
Headlight cleaner switch .......... 226

2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ............................... 227
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................ 232
1
Intuitive parking assist ................ 245
Rear view monitor system
(rear view mirror-attached
type)................................................ 255
2
Rear view monitor system
(vehicles with the Lexus
Display Audio system) ............ 264
Driving assist systems................. 269
All-wheel drive lock switch...... 275 3
Hill-start assist control ............... 276
Pre-Collision System.................. 278
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 286
4

2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle precautions........ 292
Cargo and luggage..................... 296 5
Vehicle load limits......................... 301
Winter driving tips ....................... 302
Trailer towing................................ 306
Dinghy towing ............................... 323 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index

Interior features

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio
system ........................................... 328
Display settings ............................. 332
Setup menu..................................... 334
Vehicle information.................... 340
Mobile Assistant........................... 343
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system (with the Lexus
Display Audio system) ............ 345
Automatic air conditioning
system (without a navigation
system or the Lexus Display
Audio system)............................ 353
Rear window defogger
switch............................................... 361
Windshield wiper de-icer......... 363
3-3. Using the Lexus Display
Audio system
Audio system (with the Lexus
Display Audio system) ........... 365
Using the radio............................. 368
Using the CD player.................. 383

Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA discs.................... 384
Listening to an iPod..................... 394
Listening to a USB memory..... 402
Using the AUX port .................... 412
Listening to Bluetooth®
audio................................................ 414
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................ 428
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ........................... 430
Hands-free system
(for mobile phone).................... 433
Using the Bluetooth®
phone .............................................. 441
Setting the hands-free
system ............................................ 459
Bluetooth® settings .................... 472
3-4. Using the audio system
Audio system (without a
navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio
system).......................................... 480
Using the radio............................. 483
Using the CD player................... 492
Playing MP3 and WMA
discs ................................................. 501
Operating an iPod........................ 510
Operating a USB memory...... 520
Bluetooth® audio system ........ 530
Using the Bluetooth® audio
system ........................................... 535

Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player........ 540
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player......... 544
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................................ 551
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................ 552
Using the AUX port ................... 554
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............................ 556
Hands-free system for
mobile phones........................... 560
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phones).................. 565
Making a phone call.................... 573
Setting a mobile phone.............. 578
Security and system setup....... 584
Using the phone book............... 588
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 595
• Interior lights ............................... 596
• Personal lights ............................ 596

3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features ............. 598
• Glove box .................................... 599
• Bottle holders/
door pockets.............................. 600 1
• Cup holders.................................. 601
• Console box................................ 604
• Coin holder ................................. 606
• Auxiliary boxes .......................... 606
2
• Under tray................................... 608
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors........................................ 609
Vanity mirrors................................. 610
Clock.................................................... 611
Outside temperature
display ............................................. 613
Multi-display light control.......... 615
Power outlets.................................. 616
Heated steering wheel ............... 619
Seat heaters and ventilators .... 620
Armrest ............................................ 622
Coat hooks ..................................... 623
Assist grips...................................... 624
Floor mat.......................................... 625
Luggage compartment
features.......................................... 627
Garage door opener.................. 632
Compass ........................................ 638
Safety Connect ............................. 642

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index

Maintenance and care

4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 650
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ................... 653
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 656
General maintenance ............... 659
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ....................................... 663
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 664
Hood.................................................. 667
Positioning a floor jack.............. 668
Engine compartment.................. 670
Tires .................................................. 684
Tire inflation pressure................. 693
Wheels.............................................. 697
Air conditioning filter.................. 699
Electronic key battery ................. 701
Checking and replacing
fuses ................................................ 703
Headlight aim.................................. 716
Light bulbs........................................ 719

When trouble arises

5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers..................... 734
If your vehicle needs to be
towed.............................................. 735
If you think something is
wrong ............................................. 742
Fuel pump shut off system ........ 743
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................................ 744
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 754
If you have a flat tire..................... 774
If the engine will not start .......... 789
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P............................... 791
If you lose your keys.................... 792
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ............... 793
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 796
If your vehicle overheats ........... 799
If the vehicle becomes
stuck............................................... 802
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.................................. 804

Vehicle specifications

6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).................... 806
Fuel information............................. 818
Tire information.............................. 821
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ............. 834
6-3. Initialization

For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.......................... 850 1
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..................................... 851
2
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................... 853
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
3
(in French)................................... 863

Items to initialize ........................... 847

Index

Abbreviation list .................................. 868
Alphabetical index.............................. 870 5
What to do if... ...................................... 882
6

Pictorial index

Exterior
Windshield wipers P. 217

Windshield wiper de-icer , *

Moon roof  P. 101
Front side marker lights

P. 363

P. 211

Outside rear view mirrors P. 95
Hood P. 667

Daytime running lights/
Parking lights P. 211

Turn signal lights P. 187
Front fog lights P. 215
Headlights

P. 211

Rear window defogger* P. 361
Fuel filler door P. 105
Side doors P. 52

Tires
P. 684
●Rotation
P. 774
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure P. 815
P. 821
●Information

Tail lights

P. 211

Rear window wiper P. 224
Back door P. 56

Back door opener button
P. 56

Rear side marker lights
P. 211

Rear turn signal lights P. 187

: If equipped

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
9

Pictorial index

Interior

Front SRS side airbags P. 119
Seat belts P. 83
Head restraints

P. 81

Power window switches
P. 98

Rear seats

P. 72

Door pockets P. 600
Bottle holders P. 600
Front seats P. 68
SRS driver airbag
P. 119

SRS knee airbags
P. 119

Armrest P. 622
Auxiliary box  P. 606
Rear SRS side airbags P. 119
Cup holders P. 601
Rear seat entertainment system , *2
Power outlet  P. 616
10

SRS front passenger
airbag P. 119
Power outlet P. 616
Power outlet P. 616
AUX port P. 412, 554
USB port*1 P. 394, 402, 510, 520
Console box P. 604

Rear view monitor system  P. 255
“SOS” button  P. 642
Auxiliary box  P. 606
Personal lights P. 596
Interior lights P. 596
Interior lights P. 596
Personal lights P. 596
Assist grips P. 624
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 119

Coat hooks P. 623

Moon roof switches  P. 101
Vanity mirrors P. 610
Sun visors P. 609

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 92
Garage door opener switches P. 632
Compass  P. 638

: If equipped

*1: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
11

Pictorial index

Interior

B
Inside lock buttons P. 52
Driving position memory switches 

P. 76

Outside rear view mirror
switches P. 95

Door lock switches P. 52

Power window switches P. 98
Window lock switch P. 98

C
Automatic transmission shift lever

P. 171, 178

Shift lock override button P. 791
Lexus Display Audio controller  P. 328
Cup holders P. 601

Remote Touch , *

Floor mat P. 625
VSC off switch P. 269
All-wheel drive lock switch  P. 275
Seat heater and ventilator switches  P. 620

: If equipped

*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
13

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Headlight switch P. 211
Turn signal lever P. 187
Fog light switch P. 215

Glove box P. 599
Power back door main
switch P. 58

Gauges and meters P. 191
Multi-information display P. 200
Horn P. 190

Engine (ignition) switch P. 165
Hood lock release
lever P. 667

Windshield wipers and washer switch P. 217
Rear window wiper and washer switch P. 224
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 90

Parking brake pedal P. 189

Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system

Multi display
●Display light control
P. 615

●Outside temperature
display P. 613
●Clock P. 611
●Air conditioning
display P. 353

Emergency
flasher switch

●Audio display P. 480

P. 734

Audio system
P. 480

Air conditioning
system P. 353

Security indicator
P. 110, 112

Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch P. 361

Pictorial index
A

Instrument panel

With the Lexus Display Audio system

Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defogger
switch P. 361

Lexus Display Audio
system P. 328
Rear view monitor
system P. 264

Emergency
flasher switch
P. 734

Audio system
P. 365

Air conditioning
system P. 345
Clock P. 611
Security indicator

P. 110, 112

With a navigation system

Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defogger
switch*
Navigation system*

Emergency
flasher switch
P. 734

Audio system*
Air conditioning
system*
Clock*
Security indicator

P. 110, 112

*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
17

Pictorial index
B

Instrument panel

Type A
Telephone switch* P. 433, 560

Steering wheel audio switches* P. 430, 556

Talk switch* P. 433, 560

Multi-information switches P. 200
Cruise control switch P. 227, 232

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button  P. 232

Type B
Paddle shift switches P. 171, 178
Steering wheel audio switches*
P. 430, 556

Multi-information switches P. 200
Cruise control switch P. 227, 232

Telephone switch* P. 433, 560

Talk switch* P. 433, 560
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button  P. 232

C
Head-up display main switch 
P. 206

Display contrast adjustment
switch  P. 206
Display position adjustment
switch  P. 206
Heated steering wheel
switch  P. 619

Tire pressure warning
reset switch P. 686
Pre-collision braking
off switch P. 279

: If equipped

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
19

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Cup holder P. 601
Headlight cleaner switch  P. 226
Power back door switch P. 57
Fuel filler door opener P. 105
“ODO/TRIP” button P. 192
Instrument panel light
control buttons P. 192
BSM main switch  P. 286
Windshield wiper de-icer switch , *
P. 363

: If equipped

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
20

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

Auxiliary boxes P. 627
Power back door switch P. 57

Power outlet
P. 616

Luggage cover  P. 629

Cargo hooks P. 627
Cargo hooks P. 627

: If equipped
21

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment lights P. 59

Rear seatback lock release levers

P. 72

For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Dynamic radar cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with
which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations,
sounds or pictures.

● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect /Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect /Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause injury to people. You
are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury
to yourself and others.

NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.

Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).

Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys.............................................. 30

1
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.......................... 98

1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart access system with
push-button start.................... 35
Wireless remote control......... 49

Moon roof .................................. 101
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap............................................ 105

Side doors.................................... 52
Back door .................................... 56
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)

1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system....................................... 110
Alarm........................................... 112
Theft prevention labels ........... 116

Front seats................................... 68
Rear seats.................................... 72

1-7. Safety information

Driving position memory........ 76

Correct driving posture ......... 117

Head restraints ........................... 81

SRS airbags ............................... 119

Seat belts .................................... 83

Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 132

Steering wheel.......................... 90
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 92

Child restraint systems ......... 137
Installing child restraints........ 141

Outside rear view mirrors...... 95

1-1. Key information

Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 35)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 49)

Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Card key (electronic key)
(if equipped)
Operating the smart access system with push-button start
(P. 35)

1-1. Key information

Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key:
Electronic keys: Slide the release
lever and take the key out.

Card key: Press the lock release
button and take the key out.

Before driving

If the key cannot be inserted in a
lock cylinder, turn it over and reattempt to insert it. The mechanical
key with grooves on one side can
be inserted in one direction only.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 793)
■ Card key (if equipped)
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a

problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.

● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, press down the lock release button

using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.

● To store the mechanical key in the card

key, insert it while pressing the lock
release button.

1-1. Key information

● If the battery cover is not installed and

the battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.

● The card key is not waterproof.
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 599)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 792)
■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

1-1. Key information

NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage

Observe the following:

● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to

such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,

audio systems, induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as lowfrequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that
are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function
properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-

related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including
the card key, to your Lexus dealer.
■ When a vehicle key is lost

If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your
Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that
was provided with your vehicle.

Before driving

● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.

1-1. Key information

NOTICE
■ Precautions for handling the card key
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key.

Doing so may damage the card key.

● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card

key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.

● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.

Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.

● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.

Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.

● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the

following situations:

• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical
pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Before driving

Electronic key

Electronic key
Electronic key

Locks and unlocks the side doors (P. 36)
Locks and unlocks the back door (P. 37)
Starts the engine (P. 165)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the side doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver's door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger's door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 834)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the
door handle) to lock the doors.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the back door
Press the button to lock the door.
1

Before driving

Opening the back door
Press the button to open the door.
The door automatically opens fully.
The door cannot be opened for 3
seconds after the door is locked.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the luggage
compartment
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors

When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door

handle

Touch both lock sensors on the upper and
lower part of the door handle simultaneously.

Before driving

The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
an outside door handle. (Only
the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown
on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents
resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any
warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 754)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.

Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 5
seconds.

Situation

Correction procedure

An attempt was made to lock Close all of the doors
the vehicle while a door was and lock the doors
open.
again.

The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver's door is open (The
Close the driver's door.
driver's door was opened
Interior alarm pings when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESrepeatedly
SORY mode.)
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned off
while the driver's door is
open.

Close the driver's door.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Battery-saving function

● In the following circumstances, unlocking the vehicle using the entry function

may take longer than usual:

• When the entry function has not been used for 5 days or more
• When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
● If the entry function has not been used for 14 days or more, the vehicle cannot
be unlocked by a door other than the driver's door. To unlock the vehicle, grip
the driver's door handle or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical
key.
The system will resume operation when:
● The vehicle is locked using the lock sensor.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.

(P. 49)

● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 793)

Before driving

If the vehicle is parked for a long period of time, the battery-saving function is activated in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged and the electronic key battery from being depleted.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: P. 793)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,

airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-

less communication devices

● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-

lic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit

radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the

system may not operate properly in the following cases:

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be

locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● The doors may lock or unlock if the electronic key is within the effective range

and a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or
in a car wash. The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60
seconds if a door is not opened and closed.

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key

is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

Before driving

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor or in the
glove box.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside
the vehicle.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Notes for locking the doors
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock

operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals

will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will
be given.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective

range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft.
(2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take
care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during

a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow,

mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock
sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle.

Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

■ Notes for the unlocking function
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer

to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m)

of the vehicle.

● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.

(P. 834)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.

■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 793)
● Starting the engine:P. 794
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year

and a half.)

● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine

stops. (P. 766)

● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become

depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 701)

• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•
•
•
•
•
•

TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Induction cookers
Table lamps

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 701

Before driving

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Law.
For vehicles sold in Hawaii, Guam, Saipan and Puerto Rico
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-6
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ14AEB
FCC ID: HYQ13CZF
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

For vehicles sold in the mainland U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-6
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ14AEB

FCC ID: HYQ13CZF
FCC ID: HYQ14AEF
FCC ID: HYQ13CZG
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Before driving

FCC ID: HYQ14ADF

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the
smart access system antennas. (P. 39)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.

● User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemak-

ers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about
its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for disabling the entry function.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
It also opens and closes the back door.

Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors

Before driving

Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
Opens and closes the back
door (press and hold)
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (P. 50)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals

Doors:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Back door:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back
door is opening/closing.
Windows and moon roof:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are opening.
■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
■ Security feature

P. 41
■ Panic mode

When
is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
■ Back door operation

The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when
you leave the vehicle. The back door will not be locked automatically after it has
been opened and then closed.
■ Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 112)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Reversing the operation of the power back door

Pressing the wireless remote control switch again while the power back door is
operating will cause the operation to reverse.
■ Wireless remote control operation while the power back door is closing

■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 42
■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 793)
■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 45
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 701
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

Before driving

If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors while the power back door is
closing, the doors will lock after the power back door has completely closed. To
prevent locking the keys inside the vehicle, do not place the electric key inside the
vehicle while the power back door is closing.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switches.

■ Entry function
P. 36
■ Wireless remote control
P. 49
■ Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors

■ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
STEP 2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
STEP 1

Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.

Before driving

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 793)
■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to protect the inside mechanism.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting
in death or serious injury.

Before driving

● Always use a seat belt.

● Always lock all the doors.
● Ensure that all the doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful with the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in the locked position.

● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
■ When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline,
whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is
blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare
for any unpredictable movement.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the following procedures:

■ Locking and unlocking the back door
Door lock switches
P. 52
Entry function
P. 37
Wireless remote control
P. 49
■ Opening the back door from outside the vehicle automatically
Using the back door opener button
Press the back door opener
button.

Using the wireless remote control
P. 49

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Opening the back door from outside the vehicle manually*
Raise the back door while pushing up the back door opener
button.

Before driving

*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.

■ Opening the back door from inside the vehicle
Press and hold the switch to
open/close the back door.
Pressing the switch again while
the power back door is operating will cause the operation to
reverse.

Power back door switch
Press the switch to close the back
door.
Pressing the switch again while the
power back door is closing will
cause it to open again.
However, the reverse operation
cannot be performed for the first
second after automatic operation
starts even if the switch is pressed
again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

When closing the back door
Lower the back door using the
back door handle, and make sure
to push the back door down from
the outside to close it.

Canceling the power back door system
Turn off the main switch in the glove box to disable the power back door
system.
On
Off
The back door cannot be operated
even with the wireless remote control or power back door switch.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ The power back door can be operated when
● The back door is unlocked. (Except for using the back door opener button or

wireless remote control, when the power back door can be operated even if it is
locked.)

● The power back door main switch is on.

IGNITION ON mode, the power back door main switch must be on, the vehicle speed must be lower than 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever must be in P.
(When using the back door opener button only)

● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off. (When using the wireless

remote control only)

■ Luggage compartment lights

The luggage compartment lights turn on
when the back door is opened with the luggage compartment light switch on.
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned off, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
■ Back door closer

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
● The back door closer will operate regardless of the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch mode.

● The back door can be opened while the back door closer is operating by press-

ing the back door opener button.

Before driving

● To open the power back door when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Power back door operation
● A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the

back door is opening/closing.

● The back door can still be opened and closed manually, even when the power

back door main switch is off.

● Pressing the back door opener button while the power back door system is

operating will cause the back door to switch to manual operation.

● If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, a buzzer

will sound and the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.

● If two or more successive attempts are made to close the back door, a buzzer

will sound and the back door will switch to manual operation.

■ Jam protection function

Sensors are attached to the left and right
sides of the power back door. If these sensors
detect an obstruction while the power back
door is closing, the jam protection function
will return the door to the fully open position.

■ After the back door has been opened and then closed

Lock the back door as the back door will not lock automatically.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be opened from the inside.
STEP 1

Remove the cover.
1

Before driving

STEP 2

Move the lever.

■ When reconnecting the battery or changing a fuse while the back door is open:

To enable the power back door to operate properly, initialize the system by completely closing the back door manually. If the battery is reconnected or a fuse is
changed while the back door is closed, initializing the system is not necessary.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the back door closed while driving.

If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage
may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.

● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back

door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.

● Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking

or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat
exhaustion or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door, which may result in
death or serious injury of the child.

■ Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before open-

ing it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is
opened.

● When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-

rounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back

door is about to open or close.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
● Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may

move abruptly in strong wind.

● The back door may suddenly shut if it is not

● When closing the back door, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught.

● When closing the back door, make sure to

press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
back door handle is used to fully close the
back door, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.

● Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not

hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break,
causing an accident.

● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may sud-

denly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to
be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using
a genuine Lexus part is recommended.

Before driving

opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the back door on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the back door
unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the back door is fully open
and secure before using the luggage compartment.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
■ Back door closer
● In the event that the back door is left slightly

open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the back
door closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in the
back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

● Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power

back door system is cancelled.

■ Power back door

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or

anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back

door is about to open or close.

● If the power back door system is turned off with the main switch while the back

door is operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped. The back
door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
back door may open or close unexpectedly.

● If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer

may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then
has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door
may open or close abruptly.

● On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure the

back door is fully open and secure.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
● In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and

automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or
close abruptly.

■ Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Be careful while the jam protection function is operating. Being hit by the back

door may result in an injury.

● Although the back door stops closing when the jam protection function detects

an object, take extra care as you may still be injured if part of your body is already
caught.

● If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing, the jam protection

function will cause the back door to automatically operate in the opposite direction. However, be careful not to jam body parts in the doorframe, as an injury may
result.

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

Before driving

• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode or the engine is
started during automatic operation
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power
back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may
suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck
to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door,
using a genuine Lexus part is recommended.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object

that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

● The sensors located on the right and left sides of the power back door detect

obstructions and prevent them from becoming jammed in the door. Some objects
may not be detected depending on their shape or how they are jammed. Be careful not to get fingers or other body parts caught in the back door while it is operating as this may result in a serious injury.

NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such as

stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the
damper stay rod.

● Do not touch the damper stay rod with

gloves or other fabric items.

● Do not attach any accessories other than

genuine Lexus parts to the back door.

● Do not place your hand on the damper stay

or apply lateral forces to it.

■ To prevent back door closer malfunction
● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is oper-

ating.

● If the back door is opened and closed repeatedly in a short amount of time, the

back door closer may stop operating. In this case, manually open the back door
once and wait for a while before attempting to close it again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the power back door
● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would pre-

vent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.
ating.

● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the

power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected,
the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.

● When manually closing the back door immediately after the power back door

has been automatically opened fully, some resistance may be felt.

Before driving

● Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is oper-

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support adjustment switch
Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Flattening the front seatbacks
■ Before flattening the front seatbacks
Slide the rear seats as far back as possible. (P. 72)

■ Flattening the front seatbacks
Move the front seat forward, raise
the seat, and remove the head
restraint. (P. 81)
After returning the seat to its original position, make sure to replace
the head restraint.

STEP 2

Move the seatback angle adjustment switch backward to flatten
the seatback.

Before driving

STEP 1

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback during a rear-end collision, the head
restraint moves slightly forward
and upward to help reduce the risk
of whiplash to the seat occupant.

■ Active head restraints

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move.
Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner
structure. These do not indicate problems.

Inner
structure

During
rear-end
collision

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the

● Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

■ While driving

Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat.

Before driving

seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Rear seats

Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment lever
Folding down the rear seatbacks
■ Before folding down the rear seatbacks
Stow all the head restraints and the
rear center seat belt buckle.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Folding down the rear seatbacks
From inside
Pull the seatback angle adjustment
lever.

From outside
Pull the levers.
Left side lever: Folds down the
left side rear seat
Right side lever: Folds down the
right side and
center rear seats
To return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them up
until they lock.

Before driving

To return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them up
until they lock.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Folding down the rear center seatback
Pull the center seatback angle
lever behind the seatback and fold
the seatback down.
To return the rear center seatback
to its original position, lift it up until
it locks.

CAUTION
■ When folding the rear seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
● Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
● Do not fold seatbacks down while passengers are seated or luggage is placed on

the seats.

● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to

● After folding the seatback, lightly move the seat back and forth to lock it in place.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment

while driving.

● Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the

● Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward on

Before driving

the top.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

NOTICE
■ Stowing the center seat belt buckle

Before folding down the rear seatbacks, stow the center seat belt buckle to prevent
it from becoming caught in the seatbacks.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
Press the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds press button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.

■ Recalling the memorized position
STEP 1 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” until
STEP 3
the signal beeps to recall the
desired position.

: If equipped
76

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:

STEP 1

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to P and close the driver's door. Turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press the desired button (“1”, “2” or
“3”) to recall the position. Then,
while keep pressing the button,
press the driver's door lock
switches (either lock or unlock)
until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver's
door is opened.

Before driving

Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link the
driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position
cannot be linked properly.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Power easy access system
When the driver enters and exits the vehicle, the driver's seat and steering wheel will automatically perform the following operations:
Exiting the vehicle: When all of the
following actions have been performed, the steering wheel will
move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver and the
seat will move backward (auto
away function):
• The shift lever has been shifted to P
• The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off
• The driver’s seat belt has been
unfastened

Entering the vehicle: When either
of the following actions has been
performed, the steering wheel will
move toward the driver and seat
will move forward (auto return
function):
• The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation

If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized
position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or fastening
the driver’s seat belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position.
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode and

close the driver's door.
STEP 2 While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switches

(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off

Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel position) can be activated up
to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
■ Stopping seat position operation part-way through

Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
● Adjust the steering wheel using the tilt and telescopic steering control switch

(only cancels steering wheel position recall).

■ Correct seat position

When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is
being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled.
■ The auto away function for exiting the driver seat

If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not
operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
■ Customization

The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function
can be changed. (Customizable features P. 834)

Before driving

■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger
or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Up
Pull the head restraints up.

Down
Before driving

Push the head restraint down
while pressing the lock release
button.
Lock release button

■ Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.

Lock release button
■ Installing the head restraints

Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (front seats)

Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Always raise the head restraints to the uppermost lock position during use.

CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are

locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

Before driving

● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle until
a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press
the release button.
Release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with a pre-collision system)
If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat belts
will retract before the collision. (P. 278)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. To allow the belt to extend, retract the belt and then
pull it slowly.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 141)
■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 137)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,

follow the instructions on P. 83 regarding seat belt usage.

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

Before driving

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more

than one person at once, including children.

● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat

belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 83)

Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the round part of the
abdominal area.

Before driving

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ When children are in the vehicle

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so

will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,

the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 84)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed

in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.

Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in

a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in
death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by

another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.

NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

Before driving

the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver

Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned off, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode*.

■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (vehicles with driving position

memory)

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 76)
■ Notes for the auto tilt away function (vehicles with driving position memory)

The auto tilt away function can only operate when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off, the driver seat belt has been unfastened and the driver’s
seat movement (P. 834) is in a setting other than off.
When the driver fastens the seat belt again, the steering wheel will return to the
original position. (P. 78)

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.

Before driving

*: Vehicles with driving position memory: If the driver's seat belt is fastened, the
steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating posture.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.

Automatic anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind,
the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Type A
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
Indicator

The function will set to ON mode
each time the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator
also turns off.)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Type B
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON/OFF

Indicator

The function will set to ON mode
each time the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing
turns the function
to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)
Pressing
turns the function
to ON mode. (The indicator also
turns on.)

■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.

Before driving

When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
STEP 1

To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.

Before driving

Left
Right
Pressing the same switch again
will put the switch in neutral.

STEP 2

To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left

Folding the mirrors (manual type)
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Automatically folding and extending the mirrors (power type)
■ Using the switch
Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to return them.

■ Setting automatic mode
Indicator

Automatic mode allows the folding
or extending of the mirrors to be
linked to locking/unlocking of the
doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set
automatic mode.
The indicator will come on.

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Linked mirror function when reversing

When the mirror select switch is in the “L” or “R” position, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to
give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, move the mirror select
switch to the neutral position (between “L” and “R”).

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on
the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers.
(P. 361)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position mem-

ory)

■ Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 92)

CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

■ When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.

Before driving

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 76)

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*

*: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch
Indicator

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the
power window switches on the
driver’s side even if the lock switch
is on.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power win-

dow switch in the one-touch closing position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation

explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.

STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Con-

tinue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Con-

tinue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once

again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Before driving

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(P. 793)

● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.

(P. 49)

■ When the battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

CAUTION
■ Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a

position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.
The driver is responsible for instructing children not to operate the power windows.

■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the window fully closes. Also, the jam protection does not operate when the
power window switch is pulled up continually to close the windows.

100

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up
and down.

■ Opening and closing

Opens the moon roof*

Before driving

The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position to
reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.

■ Tilting up and down
Tilts the moon roof up*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon
roof partway.

: If equipped
101

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It
cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 793)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 49)

102

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

■ When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.

STEP 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1

STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then

release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up

position and stops.
STEP 3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch

again.*1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then

release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have
to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for
approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check
to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure
correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)
103

Before driving

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while

it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a

position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury. The driver
is responsible for instructing children not to operate the moon roof.

■ Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the moon roof fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

104

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

■ Before refueling the vehicle
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.

Before driving

● Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 107)
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
STEP 1

Press the opener to open the
fuel filler door.

STEP 2

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.

STEP 3

Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.

105

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.

■ When the fuel filler door cannot be opened by pressing the inside switch
STEP 1 Open the back door and lift the deck board up. (P. 776)
STEP 2

With a compact spare tire only:
Remove the spare tire cover.

STEP 3

Remove the auxiliary box.

106

1-5. Refueling

STEP 4

Pull the lever.

Before driving

STEP 5

Install the auxiliary box using the clips.

■ Fuel types

Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)

107

1-5. Refueling

CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted

metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to

come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off
● Do not top off the fuel tank
■ When replacing the fuel cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.

108

1-5. Refueling

NOTICE
■ Refueling

109

Before driving

Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

Vehicles with a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.

110

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

Before driving

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key

with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

This system meets the certification requirements of Radio Law.
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.

111

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is
detected.

■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using
the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.
(The doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
● Some models: The back door window is tapped or broken.

112

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ Setting the alarm system
Vehicles with a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
1

Before driving

Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.

Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.

■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

113

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door

or the hood.

● The battery is recharged or replaced

when the vehicle is locked.

■ Alarm-operated door lock
● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent

intruders.

● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make

sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.

114

1-6. Theft deterrent system

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Before driving
115

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.

116

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 68)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 68)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable. (P. 68)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(P. 90)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 81)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 83)

Before driving
117

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are

not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

118

1-7. Safety information

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.

Before driving

SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

119

1-7. Safety information

SRS side and curtain shield airbags
Front SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
Rear SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
SRS curtain shield airbags
● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
● Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the
vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

120

1-7. Safety information

SRS airbag system components

Before driving

Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Front side airbags
Front passenger occupant
classification system
(ECU and sensors)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Rear side airbags
SRS warning light
Driver airbag

Curtain shield and rear side
airbag sensors
Driver's seat belt buckle
switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Door sensors
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters

121

1-7. Safety information

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information
obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram
above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills
the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)

SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as

well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot
for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a

severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to
the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to
push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants
to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 642)

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the

set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which
can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which
the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

122

1-7. Safety information

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt preten-

sioners will activate.

● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no pas-

senger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the
front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 132)

The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the
impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding
with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-

sion (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the
illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

123

Before driving

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

1-7. Safety information

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags

(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in
a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

124

1-7. Safety information

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

Before driving

● Pitching end over end

■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags has been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of the doors is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

125

1-7. Safety information

● The surface of the seats with the side air-

bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars

or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

126

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or

serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.

127

Before driving

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-

nected to the front seat belt buckles but the
seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the
SRS front airbags will judge that the driver
and front passenger are wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can

cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-

ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the
front passenger seat. (P. 137)

128

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean

against the dashboard.

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to

hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side

rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-

senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.

129

Before driving

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything

against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas such as the

door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and may
cause death or serious injury, should the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbags will deploy, be sure

to remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags

inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag

components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have

deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door

or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and

front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by
your Lexus dealer.

130

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument

panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant

compartment

● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or winches
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

131

Before driving

will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may
not deploy in the event of a collision.

1-7. Safety information

Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the condition of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
Without a navigation system or
the Lexus Display Audio system

With a navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio system

SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

132

1-7. Safety information

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*2

Activated

■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated

133

Before driving

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Devices
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

1-7. Safety information

■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
Not illuminated
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Deactivated or
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
activated*6

■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light

Devices

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Flashing
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

134

1-7. Safety information

*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*5: If the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (P. 141)
*6: Activated only in cases of side impact
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the

buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the

seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the
passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on

the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on

the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
135

Before driving

*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 137)

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This

may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-

minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 141)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,

the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-

backs.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat

cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

136

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 141)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat

137

Before driving

Points to remember

1-7. Safety information

Forward facing  Convertible seat

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and

use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 83)

138

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must

● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to

the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even

if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if a rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front
passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the

front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

139

Before driving

be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior. This may cause death or serious
injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the
SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the

child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.

Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or

store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

140

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt.
Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
1

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Before driving

Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outer rear seats. (Buttons
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 83)

Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.

141

1-7. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system
Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72)

STEP 1

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower straps
STEP 3
onto the LATCH anchors. If the
child restraint has a top tether
strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether
strap anchor bracket.
STEP 2

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.

Canada only

142

1-7. Safety information

Type B
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top tether
strap should be latched onto the
top tether strap anchor bracket.

STEP 3

Canada only
STEP 4

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 148)

143

Before driving

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
STEP 1
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72)

STEP 2

STEP 3

144

Place the child restraint system on
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.

1-7. Safety information

STEP 4

While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

■ Forward-facing Convertible seat
Fold the seatback while pulling the
STEP 1
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72)

STEP 2

Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

145

Before driving

STEP 5

Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

1-7. Safety information

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

STEP 6

146

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 148)

1-7. Safety information

■ Booster seat
STEP 1

STEP 3

Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the child
restraint system according to the
manufacturer's instructions and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 83)

147

Before driving

STEP 2

Fold the seatback while pulling the
seatback angle adjustment lever.
Return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position. (P. 72)

1-7. Safety information

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1

STEP 2

Secure the child restraint system
using a seat belt or the LATCH
anchors, and remove the head
restraint.

Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.

148

1-7. Safety information

STEP 3

Replace the head restraint and lift
it up to the uppermost lock position.
1

Before driving

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 85)

149

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child

restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it

does not interfere with the child restraint
system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).

● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat

cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. The
seatbacks must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in
the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● When using the LATCH system, move the seat as far back as possible and adjust

the seatback as upright as possible.

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.

150

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to

ensure that it has been securely installed.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-

turer.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden
swerve or accident.

151

Before driving

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

1-7. Safety information

152

When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle.................. 154

2
2-4. Using other driving
systems

Engine (ignition) switch......... 165

Cruise control......................... 227

Automatic transmission
(6-speed models) .................. 171

Dynamic radar cruise
control .................................... 232

Automatic transmission
(8-speed models) ................. 178

Intuitive parking assist.......... 245

Turn signal lever....................... 187
Parking brake........................... 189
Horn ............................................ 190
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................. 191
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 194
Multi-information
display.................................... 200
Head-up display ..................... 206
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch....................... 211
Fog light switch ........................ 215
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 217
Rear window wiper and
washer .................................... 224
Headlight cleaner switch..... 226

Rear view monitor system
(rear view mirror-attached
type) ........................................ 255
Rear view monitor system
(vehicles with the Lexus
Display Audio system)....... 264
Driving assist systems........... 269
All-wheel drive lock
switch....................................... 275
Hill-start assist control .......... 276
Pre-Collision System............ 278
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) .......... 286
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle
precautions........................... 292
Cargo and luggage ............... 296
Vehicle load limits................... 301
Winter driving tips................. 302
Trailer towing .......................... 306
Dinghy towing......................... 323
153

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■ Starting the engine
P. 165
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 171, 178)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 189)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N. (P. 171, 178)

■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake. (P. 189)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 171, 178)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
STEP 4
STEP 5

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.

Starting off on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

154

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to
D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ When starting off on an uphill

The hill-start assist control is available. (P. 276)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows

may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially

slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because

■ Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is
due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

•
•
•
•

Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

155

When driving

there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 808)
■ Eco-friendly driving

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on.
When the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco
driving, and when the vehicle is stopped, the
light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in
the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in anything other than D.
● The paddle shift switch is operated. (if

equipped)

● The driving mode is set to snow mode.

(P. 173, 180)

● The vehicle speed is approximately 80

mph (130 km/h) or higher.

■ Customization

Setting of Eco Driving Indicator Light can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator

pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or

roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check

that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause
driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

157

When driving

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals
properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine

from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while

driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to
these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you
should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 804

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a

steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 171, 178)

● When stopped on an incline, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backward or forward, causing an accident.

● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside

rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting
in death or serious injury.

● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not

outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do

not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

158

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce

your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine

speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.

159

When driving

the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep

depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the

vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.

160

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-

cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:

● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain-

ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs
or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal-

lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to
act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock

the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after

turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is

snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

161

When driving

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such
as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded
or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such

as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.

● The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so
may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health
hazard.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side
of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles

closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems

fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.

162

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel
the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

as this may restrain driving torque.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at

the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an

extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-

ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 774)

163

When driving

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle,

transfer (AWD models), differential, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (AWD models), bearings and suspen-

sion joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

164

2-1. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.

■ Starting the engine
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will turn green. If the
indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.

When driving

STEP 4

Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 30 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from
any “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.

■ Stopping the engine
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 189)
STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
STEP 5 Release the brake pedal and check that the indicator on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
165

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be
used.

ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.

IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to off.

166

2-1. Driving procedures

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn
the switch off:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

■ Auto power off function

When the shift lever is in P, if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode with the engine not running for more than 20 minutes (ACCESSORY mode)
or one hour (IGNITION ON mode), the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge.
Do not leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press
and hold the switch.
■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 45
■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 42
■ Note for the entry function

P. 43

167

When driving

STEP 4

Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is illuminated in amber and then press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch once.
Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is off.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 110)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Steering lock

After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing the
doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels the steering
lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released

The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash and a message will be shown on the multi-information
display. Press the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended
if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case,
refrain from operating the engine. After about 2 seconds, the steering lock motor
will resume functioning.
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

P. 701

168

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 804)
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.

169

When driving

If the vehicle begins to slide due to engine failure or other circumstances, do not
lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.

● If the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is illuminated, the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always
check that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.

● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the

engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the
vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle

checked by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

If the “ENGINE START STOP” seems to be operating somewhat differently than
usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your
Lexus dealer immediately.

170

2-1. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission (6-speed models)
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

When driving

While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.

171

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Shift position purpose
Shift position

Function

Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving*1

S mode driving*2 (P. 174)

*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the
driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended
for normal driving.

*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible

gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.

172

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Selecting snow mode
Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces such as snow.
STEP 1

Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display
will change modes to electronic
features control mode.

STEP 2

When driving

Press the “” or “” switch
until “ECT SNOW” appears.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The “ECT SNOW” indicator will
be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns snow mode on and off.

Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.

173

2-1. Driving procedures

Changing shift ranges in S mode
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to the S position. The shift range can
then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches (if
equipped) or the shift lever. Changing the shift range allows restriction of
the upper limit of the gears to be used, preventing unnecessary upshifting
and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
Upshifting
Downshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “5” or “4” according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to “3” if
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(P. 176)
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. But the gear is limited according to
selected shift range.
● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

174

2-1. Driving procedures

Selecting shift ranges in the D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+”
paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the
upper limit of the gears to be used, preventing unnecessary upshifting
and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.

■ Shift ranges and their functions
P. 174

175

When driving

Upshifting
Downshifting
To return to normal D position
driving, the “+” paddle shift switch
must be held down for a period of
time.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position (vehicles with pad-

dle shift switches)

When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be
automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear
lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position (vehicles with

paddle shift switches)

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● When range 6 is selected and the accelerator pedal is depressed
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned off after driving in snow mode.
■ S mode
● When the shift range is “5” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the

shift range to “6”.

● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
● To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically

selects a higher shift range when the fluid temperature is high.

■ AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

176

2-1. Driving procedures

■ When driving with cruise control or radar cruise control activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting
to 5 or 4 because cruise control or radar cruise control will not be canceled.
(P. 227, 232)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 791
■ If S does not come on or D comes on even after shifting the shift lever to S

■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

177

When driving

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same as manner as when the
shift lever is in D.)

2-1. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission (8-speed models)
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

■ Shift position purpose
Shift position

Function

Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving*

M mode driving (P. 183)

*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.

178

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Shift position uses
Shift position

Display

Purpose

Normal D
position driving

Gears
between 1 and
8 are automatically
selected
according to
driving conditions

Shift range
selection
(P. 181)

Allows optimum use of
engine braking

When driving

(paddle shift
switches activated)

Function

Allows the
Individual gear
driver to select
selection
gears for
(P. 183)
sporty driving

179

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Selecting snow mode
Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces such as snow.
STEP 1

Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display
will change modes to electronic
features control mode.

Press the “” or “” switch
until “ECT SNOW” appears.
STEP 2

Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The “ECT SNOW” indicator will
be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns snow mode on and off.

Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.

180

2-1. Driving procedures

Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+”
paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the
highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of
engine braking force to be selected.

To return to normal D position
driving, the “+” paddle shift switch
must be held down for a period of
time.

181

When driving

Higher shift range
Lower shift range
The selected shift range, from 1 to
8, will be displayed in the meter
cluster.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Shift ranges and their functions
Meter cluster display*

Function

Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

Gears between 1 and 7 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

Gears between 1 and 6 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

Gears between 1 and 5 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

Gears between 1 and 4 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

Gears between 1 and 3 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

Gears between 1 and 2 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions

The gear is set at 1

*: “D” is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift
range.

182

2-1. Driving procedures

Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to the M position. Gears can then be
selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you
to drive in the gear of your choosing.

When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or
paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:
● When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
● When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature
is low.
● When engine speed is higher than necessary. (upshift only)

183

When driving

Upshifting
Downshifting
The gear changes once every time
the shift lever or paddle shift switch
is operated.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Gear functions
Meter cluster
display*

Function

The gear is fixed at 8th gear

The gear is fixed at 7th gear

The gear is fixed at 6th gear

The gear is fixed at 5th gear

The gear is fixed at 4th gear

The gear is fixed at 3rd gear

The gear is fixed at 2nd gear

The gear is fixed at 1st gear

*: “M” is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
■ When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position
● When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will

be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one
gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.

● If the “-” paddle shift switch is operated when a shift range is selected while in

the D position, the shift range may be lowered by two ranges or more in accordance with the driving conditions.

■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time in

one shift range

184

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Downshift restrictions warning buzzer

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in M mode and downshifting
to 7, 6, 5 or 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (P. 227)
2

■ Automatic deactivation of snow mode

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 791
■ Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped

When the vehicle comes to a stop, the transmission will automatically downshift to
allow you to start off in 1st gear.
■ If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning message is displayed while
driving, make sure you return to normal D
position driving and reduce speed by easing off the accelerator pedal. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to the
P position and let the engine idle until the
warning message goes out.
When the warning message goes out, the
vehicle can be driven again.
If the warning message does not go out
after waiting a while, have your vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.

185

When driving

If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off after driving in snow mode, the
mode is automatically deactivated.

2-1. Driving procedures

■ AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. However, operating the “-” paddle shift switch will restrict the function’s operation. (Shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

186

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intention of the
driver:
Type A
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)

When driving

The right hand signals will flash
3 times.

Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.

187

2-1. Driving procedures

Type B
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
release it)
The right hand signals will flash
3 times.

Lane change to the left (move
the lever partway and release
it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.
■ Customization

The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

188

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

U.S.A.

Canada

To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake pedal
with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal with
your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
2

When driving

■ Usage in winter time

P. 302

NOTICE
■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

189

2-1. Driving procedures

Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.

190

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

When driving

Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 200)

Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to
record and display different distances independently.

Shift position and shift range display
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 171, 178)

Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature

191

2-2. Instrument cluster

Changing the display
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the
trip meter.

Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

192

2-2. Instrument cluster

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-

cates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the

red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check
the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 799)

When driving
193

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster, center panel
and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s
various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all indicators and warning lights illuminated.

■ Instrument cluster

194

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Center panel
With a navigation system

When driving

With the Lexus Display Audio system

Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system

195

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Outside rear view mirrors (if equipped)

196

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 187)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 213)

(Canada)

(P. 270, 276)

Headlight indicator
(P. 211)

*1 VSC off indicator

Tail light indicator
(P. 211)

*1 Eco Driving Indicator

Front fog light indicator
(P. 215)

*1, 2 Slip indicator

When driving

(U.S.A.)

(if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist
indicator
(P. 245)

(P. 271)

Light (P. 156)

SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 132)

(if equipped)

Cruise control indicator
(P. 227, 232)

SRS airbag on-off indicator (P. 132)

(if equipped)

Radar cruise control indicator (P. 232)

197

2-2. Instrument cluster

*1
(AWD models
only)

All-wheel drive lock indicator (P. 275)

*1 BSM indicator

“ECT SNOW” indicator
(P. 173, 180)

*1, 3 Pre-collision system

(P. 286)
(if equipped)

warning light (P. 278)
(if equipped)

*4 BSM outside rear view
(if equipped)

mirror indicators
(P. 286)

*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned

to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer, for details.

*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes faster
than usual to indicate that the system is operating.

*4: In

order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:

• When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not
turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

198

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 744)

*1
(U.S.A.)

*1
(Canada)

(if equipped)

(U.S.A.)

*1
(Canada)

(Canada)

When driving

(U.S.A.)

*1, 2

*1
(for driver)

(for front
passenger)

*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is
being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a
few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer, for details.

*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to
help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

199

2-2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature.

■ Multi-information switches
“” “” switch
Changes items.

“ENTER” switch
Turns on/off electronic features
controls and changes customization settings.

Menu switch
Changes mode from normal
display to electronic features,
customization or back to normal
display.

200

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Display contents

When driving

Trip information contents

Switching display items

Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption after
refueling
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed

Press the “” or “” switch.

Cruising range
Multi-information display off
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

201

2-2. Instrument cluster

Electronic features control contents

Setting electronic features controls

Intuitive parking assist
(if equipped)

P. 245

Snow mode

P. 173, 180

Other contents
Outside temperature

Details
Displays the outside temperature

Dynamic radar cruise control display Automatically displayed when using
(if equipped) (P. 232)
dynamic radar cruise control

202

Customization (P. 834)

Settings of functions such as the
door lock and light illumination time
can be changed

Warning message (P. 754)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle's systems

2-2. Instrument cluster

Trip information
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled
2

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

• The function can be reset by pushing the “ENTER” switch for longer
than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset
The function can be reset by pushing the “ENTER” switch for longer than
one second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off. If the
vehicle is refueled without turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
off, the display may not be updated.

■ Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
P. 204

203

When driving

■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Electronic features control can be turned on/off when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Conditions for ending electronic features control

In the following situations, the electronic features control will end:
● The menu switch is pressed.
● The dynamic radar cruise control is operated (if equipped).
● Intuitive parking assist starts operating (if equipped).
● No action is performed for some time after the electronic features control

screen is displayed.

● A warning message appears after the electronic features control screen is dis-

played.

■ Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests Eco driving range with current
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If Zone of Eco driving is exceeded, the
right of Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will blink and Eco Driving Indicator
Light will turn off.
■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a

garage, tunnel, etc.)

204

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. available languages) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)
2

CAUTION
When operating the electronic features control while driving, take extra notice of
the vehicle's surrounding area.

205

When driving

■ Caution while driving

2-2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other information onto the windshield.

Head-up display
Display brightness will change
automatically according to the
brightness of the surrounding
area.

Head-up display main switch
Display contrast adjustment
switch
Display brightness can be
adjusted to the desired level.

Display position adjustment
switch

: If equipped
206

2-2. Instrument cluster

■ Head-up display contents
In addition to vehicle speed, the following information will be displayed:
Audio display
Displays audio information for
approximately 3 seconds when
the audio system is operated

Shift position and shift range
display

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range
(P. 171, 178)

When driving

Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
Displays the approach warning
message (P. 759)

Pre-collision system display
(if equipped)
Displays the brake warning
(P. 759)

Turn-by-turn navigation
display*
Displays a notification of
upcoming intersections during
navigation system route guidance

Vehicle speed display
*: Refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.

207

2-2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display main switch
Pressing the switch turns the headup display on/off and changes the
vehicle speed display units as follows:
Vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
OFF  ON (mph)  ON
(km/h) OFF
Except vehicles sold in the
U.S.A.
OFF  ON (km/h)  ON
(mph) OFF

Display adjustment
Adjusting display contrast
Brighter
Darker

Adjusting display position
Higher
Lower

208

2-2. Instrument cluster

Display customization
The audio mode display and/or the shift position and shift range display
can be shown or hidden.

Customization can be performed
when the head-up display is on and
the vehicle is traveling at less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
■ Brightness of the head-up display

The headlight control sensor detects the brightness of the area surrounding the
head-up display and adjusts the brightness accordingly. (P. 213)
■ Head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

CAUTION
■ Before using the head-up display

Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image's position or brightness
may obstruct the driver's view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.

209

When driving

Press and hold the head-up display
main switch changes the display to
the display on/off mode.
Press the head-up display main
switch to select the desired setting
item. Press and hold the head-up
display main switch to turn the display on/off.

2-2. Instrument cluster

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to components
● Do not place anything on the head-up display opening.
● If an object falls into the opening of the

head-up display, remove it immediately.
Also, avoid spilling water or other liquids
near the head-up display opening as this
may cause mechanical damage.

210

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Type A
The headlights and
side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode)
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn off.

When driving
211

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Type B
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The headlights and
side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
is in IGNITION ON
mode)
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime running lights) turn on.

212

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.

Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams with
the headlights on or off.
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the daytime running lights

turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is
released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
Type A: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers

greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.

213

When driving

Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds

after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately
if
on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)

● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off
and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION
ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to
or
.
If any of the doors is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ Light reminder buzzer (headlights)

A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off or turned
to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the headlights are
turned on.
■ Illuminated entry system

If the wireless remote control switch is used to unlock the vehicle when the light
switch is in
and the surrounding area is dark, the parking light turns on.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

214

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
and fog.

Type A
Turns the front fog
lights off
Turns the front fog
lights on

When driving
215

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Type B
Turns the front fog
lights off
Turns the front fog
lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

216

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Windshield wipers and washer
■ Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper
intervals can be also adjusted.
Off
Intermittent
windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation

When driving
217

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaners will operate
once.

218

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers
When
is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts
wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
When
is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted as
follows by turning the switch ring:
Type A

When driving

Off
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
Low speed wiper
operation
High speed wiper
operation
Temporary operation

219

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Type B
Off
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
Low speed wiper
operation
High speed wiper
operation
Temporary operation

Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)

220

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts. (After operating several times, the wipers
operate one more time after a
short delay to prevent dripping.)
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaners will operate
once.

When driving

■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode:
● Intermittent wiper interval
● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention

wiper sweep occurs)

When low speed wiper operation is selected, wiper operation will be switched from
low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode cannot be switched.)

221

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount

of raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
● If the wiper switch is turned to the

position while the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show
that AUTO mode is activated.

● When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in AUTO mode, the

wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is enhanced.

● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or 5F

(-15C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur.
In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with

rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The
fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

222

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

When driving

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

223

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Rear window wiper and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Type A
Off
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation

224

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Type B

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is operated continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

225

When driving

Off
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight cleaner switch

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the
headlights.

■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight
switch is turned on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation

When the windshield washer is operated with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights on, the headlight cleaner will operate
once. (P. 217)

NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

: If equipped
226

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.

Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
2

STEP 1

Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

: If equipped
227

When driving

■ Setting the vehicle speed

2-4. Using other driving systems

STEP 2

Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” will be displayed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.

■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

228

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).

When driving

229

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected. (vehicles with-

out paddle shift switch)

● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the

paddle shift. (vehicles with paddle shift switch)

● Vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed

resumes.

● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by

first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever
down to set the new speed.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the

preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● Enhanced VSC is activated. (vehicles with enhanced VSC)
● VSC is activated. (vehicles with VSC)
■ If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

230

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic

When driving

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

231

2-4. Using other driving systems

Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.

Indicator (vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode)
Indicator (constant speed
control mode)
Display
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
Cruise control switch

■ Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
STEP 1
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator
will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

: If equipped
232

2-4. Using other driving systems

STEP 2

Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:

When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held

233

When driving

■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 238), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes the
Preceding vehicle mark
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle mark
will also be displayed.

234

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with
vehicle speed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Approximately 164 ft. (50 m)

Medium

Approximately 132 ft. (40 m)

Short

Approximately 82 ft. (25 m)

■ Canceling and resuming the speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set
speed.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

235

When driving

Distance options

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up
to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicleto-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the
system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in
on the vehicle ahead.

236

2-4. Using other driving systems

Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied

237

When driving

Approach warning

2-4. Using other driving systems

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other
vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

Switch to constant speed control mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately one second.)
Constant speed control mode indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.

238

2-4. Using other driving systems

If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off and then turned
to IGNITION ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 233
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 235

When driving

■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift.

(vehicles with paddle shift switch)

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● Enhanced VSC is activated. (vehicles with enhanced VSC)
● VSC is activated. (vehicles with VSC)
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper switch is set

to the AUTO mode or the high speed wiper operation position).

● When the snow mode is set.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

239

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control

The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the

set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● Enhanced VSC is activated. (vehicles with enhanced VSC)
● VSC is activated. (vehicles with VSC)
■ Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor

■ Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control

Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 759)

240

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

241

When driving

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.

■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

242

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and

down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors

from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 237) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

243

When driving

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function

correctly

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-

ing of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage

compartment etc.)

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding

area.

● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.

244

2-4. Using other driving systems

Intuitive parking assist

The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display, screen (vehicles with the Lexus Display
Audio system) and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a
garage is conducted. Always check the surrounding area when using this
system.

■ Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors

When driving

■ Setting the intuitive parking assist mode
Press the menu switch.
STEP 1
The multi-information display
will change modes to electronic features control mode.
Press the “” or “” switch
until the intuitive parking
assist mark appears in the
multi-information display.

: If equipped
245

2-4. Using other driving systems

STEP 2

Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The intuitive parking assist indicator will be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns the intuitive parking assist
on and off.
When on, the buzzer sounds to
inform the driver that the system
is operational.

Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and screen (vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio
system) depending on the position and distance to the obstacle.
■ Multi-information display
Front corner sensor operation
Front center sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation

246

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Screen (vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system)
When the vehicle is moving forward
The graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 252)

A simplified image is displayed on
the right upper corner of the
screen when an obstacle is
detected.

247

When driving

When the vehicle is moving backward

2-4. Using other driving systems

The distance display and buzzer
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
The site of the obstacle will flash (detection level 4 only).

■ Front corner sensors
Detection
level

248

Multi-information
display

Approximate distance to obstacle

Buzzer

1.6 to 1.2 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm)

Medium

1.2 to 0.8 ft.
(37.5 to 25 cm)

Fast

0.8 ft. (25 cm) or
less

Continuous

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Front center sensors
Detection
level

Multi-information
display

Buzzer

3.3 to 1.6 ft.
(100 to 50 cm)

Slow

1.6 to 1.3 ft.
(50 to 40 cm)

Medium

1.3 to 1.0 ft.
(40 to 30 cm)

Fast

1.0 ft. (30 cm) or
less

Continuous

Approximate distance to obstacle

Buzzer

1.6 to 1.2 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm)

Medium

1.2 to 0.8 ft.
(37.5 to 25 cm)

Fast

0.8 ft. (25 cm) or
less

Continuous

When driving

Approximate distance to obstacle

■ Rear corner sensors
Detection
level

Multi-information
display

249

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear center sensors
Detection
level

250

Multi-information
display

Approximate distance to obstacle

Buzzer

4.9 to 2.0 ft.
(150 to 60 cm)

Slow

2.0 to 1.5 ft.
(60 to 45 cm)

Medium

1.5 to 1.2 ft.
(45 to 35 cm)

Fast

1.2 ft. (35 cm) or
less

Continuous

2-4. Using other driving systems

Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles
that are extremely close to the
vehicle.

The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.

When driving

251

2-4. Using other driving systems

Customization of the intuitive parking assist (vehicle with the Lexus
Display Audio system)
The buzzer volume, display and buzzer timing and display of the graphic
on the screen can be customized.

STEP 4

Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Alert volume setting
Display on/off
Alert distance setting

STEP 5

When you complete settings, select “Save”.

STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
● Front corner sensors:

• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Front center sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Rear corner and center sensors:
• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.

252

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the

ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•

● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular

attention to the following obstacles:
•
•
•
•
•

Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle

■ If a message is displayed

P. 754

253

When driving

There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
A sensor is frozen.
A sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they
are.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

CAUTION
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
■ Conditions possibly indicating system malfunctions

If any of the following occurs, the system may be malfunctioning due to a sensor failure etc. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● The buzzer does not sound when the intuitive parking assist mode is set.
● The sensor operation display flashes and the buzzer sounds even when no obsta-

cle is detected.

● An area of the sensors is hit or subjected to a strong impact.
● Either bumper is hit.
● The sensor operation display remains on even though no buzzer sounds.

254

2-4. Using other driving systems

Rear view monitor system (rear view mirror-attached type)
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.

The rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in the R
position.
The screen turns off in the following situations:

: If equipped
255

When driving

• The shift lever is shifted out
of R.
• The screen remains on for
approximately 5 minutes.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The rear view monitor system can be operated when

The shift lever is in R, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Changing display modes

The rear view monitor display mode can be changed while the screen is on.
● To temporarily disable the rear view monitor system

Press

The indicator will turn amber.
The system will be re-enabled once the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
off and then turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
● To constantly disable the rear view monitor system

Press and hold
for 12 to 15 seconds.
The screen will turn off and on after 6 seconds. Keep pressing the button until the
screen turns back off. The indicator will
flash amber.
The system will not automatically turn on
again after the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is off and then turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
● To re-enable the rear view monitor system

Press

256

. The indicator will turn green.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Selecting a language (English, French or Spanish)
STEP 1 Press and hold

for 6 to 12

seconds.

The screen will turn on and the
indicator will turn green.
STEP 2 Press

257

When driving

Each time
is pressed
and released, the language
changes. A message will flash
in the mirror for 5 seconds
after the button is released,
indicating that the change has
been completed.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear view monitor guide lines

Guide lines are displayed on the screen.
Guidelines shown differ from those
shown on the actual screen.
Vehicle width extension guide lines
(blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle width extension.
Distance guide line (blue)
This line indicates a position on the
ground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on the
ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.
Distance guide line (red)
This line indicates a position on the
ground about 1.5ft. (0.5 m) behind on
the ground of the rear bumper of your
vehicle.
Vehicle center guide lines (blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

258

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Displayed area

The area detected by the camera is limited.
Object which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot
be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road
conditions.

Corners of bumper
■ Driving precautions

When the grade behind the vehicle slopes
up sharply, objects appear to be farther
away than they actually are.

259

When driving

The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the grade behind the vehicle slopes
down sharply, objects appear to be closer
than they actually are.

The distance that appears on the screen
between three-dimensional objects (such
as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the
road) and the actual distance differ as follows.
In reality, C = A < B (C and A are equally far
away; B is farther than C and A). However,
on the screen, the situation appears to be A
< B < C.
On the screen, it appears that a truck is
parking about 1.5 ft (0.5 m) away. However, in reality if you back up to point A, you
will hit the track.

260

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear view monitor system camera

The rear view monitor system camera is
located on the back door as shown in the
illustration.
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at

night.

● The temperature near the lens is
● Water droplets are on the camera lens

or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.

● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,

adheres to the camera lens.

● The sun or headlights are shining

directly into the camera lens.

● A bright object such as a white wall is

reflected in the mirror surface over the
monitor.

● The camera has scratches or dirt on it.
■ Smear effect

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect  A phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up by
the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have
a vertical streak above and below it.

261

When driving

extremely high or low.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Flicker effect

When the camera is used under fluorescent light, sodium lights, or mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to

avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries:
● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed image

may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely
visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually and with the mirrors before proceeding.

● Always check the vehicle surrounding area, because the guide lines are ancillary

lines.

● The guide lines are ancillary lines and do not change even if the steering wheel is

turned.

● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-

tances.

● Do not use the system if the back door is open.

262

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE
■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle

may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in

cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and

wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted
■ Camera precautions
● As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or

modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

● Do not subject the camera to a strong impact.
● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water drop-

lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If
the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. Do not rub hard.

● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to

the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

● Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot

transmit a clear image.

● When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera

or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

● When replacing tires, please consult your Lexus dealer. If you replace the tires,

the area displayed on the screen may change.

263

When driving

when the system is cold.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Rear view monitor system (vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system)
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of
the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner
as that of the rear view mirror.

The rear view image is displayed
when the shift lever is in the R
position.
If the shift lever is shifted out of
R, the screen returns to the previous one.

: If equipped
264

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Displayed area

Corners of bumper

265

When driving

The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that appears on
the screen differs from the actual distance.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear view monitor system camera

night.

● The temperature near the lens is

extremely high or low.

● Water droplets are on the camera lens

or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.

● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,

adheres to the camera lens.

● The sun or headlights are shining

directly into the camera lens.

● A bright object such as a white wall is

reflected in the mirror surface over the
monitor.

● The camera has scratches or dirt on it.
■ Smear effect

266

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Flicker effect

When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights
etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system, observe the following precautions to

avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries:

● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.

● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual dis-

tances.

● Do not use the system if the back door is open.

267

When driving

● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed image

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE
■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle

may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in

cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

● If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and

wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted

when the system is cold.

■ Camera precautions
● As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or

modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

● Do not subject the camera to a strong impact.
● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water drop-

lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If
the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. Do not rub hard.

● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to

the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

● Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot

transmit a clear image.

● When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera

or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

● When replacing tires, please consult your Lexus dealer. If you replace the tires,

the area displayed on the screen may change.

268

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
2

■ Brake assist
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces

■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

■ Hill-start assist control
P. 276

■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel

■ Active Torque Control 4WD system (AWD models)
Automatically switches from front-wheel drive to AWD (All-Wheel Drive)
according to driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD are
when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the
road surface is slippery due to snow or rain etc.

269

When driving

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced vehicle stability control) (if equipped)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.

■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management) (if equipped)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, and EPS systems.
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes and engine output.

■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 278

■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
P. 286

When the VSC/TRAC systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or if any of the drive wheels
spins, the slip indicator light flashes
to indicate that the VSC/TRAC
systems are operating.

270

2-4. Using other driving systems

Disabling TRAC and/or VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off the TRAC system only
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the
switch.

Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.

■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the switch
for 3 seconds or more while the
vehicle is stopped.
A message will be shown on the
multi-information display and VSC
off indicator light will come on.
Press the switch again to turn the
systems back on.

271

When driving

A message will be shown on the
multi-information display.

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that

TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC off switch has not been pressed

TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, VSC, TRAC and brake assist
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is

started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-

ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•

Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC /VSC systems

Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC/VSC systems will automatically
reactivate them.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off,
the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should
return to normal within 10 minutes.

272

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively

worn tires on a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-

tions

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

273

When driving

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn
the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
inflation pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed
on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system malfunction.

274

2-4. Using other driving systems

All-wheel drive lock switch (AWD models)
All-wheel drive lock mode can be used when a large amount of drive power
needs to be applied to all the wheels, such as when the vehicle gets stuck in
mud and you need to free it.

Press the switch.
The torque of the engine is distributed to the rear wheels to
the maximum extent possible in
accordance with driving conditions.

■ All-wheel drive lock mode
● All-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the brakes are applied to ensure

the ABS and VSC systems operate effectively.

● All-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph

(40 km/h).

275

When driving

Pressing the switch again cancels all-wheel drive lock mode
and returns the active torque
control 4WD system to normal
mode. (P. 269)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Hill-start assist control
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards
when starting on an incline or slippery slope.

To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is
stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to
indicate the system is activated.
The slip indicator will also start
flashing.

■ Hill-start assist control can be operated when
● The shift lever is in a position other than P.
● The parking brake is not applied.
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
■ Hill-start assist control
● While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically

applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high
mounted stoplight turn on.

● Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is

released.

● If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake

pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do
not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operating conditions explained above
have been met.

276

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Hill-start assist control buzzer
● When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
● In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the

buzzer will sound twice.

■ If the slip indicator comes on

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION
■ Hill-start assist control
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not oper-

ate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered in ice.

● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehi-

cle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start
assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended period of time, as
doing so may lead to an accident.

277

When driving

• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of
releasing the brake pedal.
• The shift lever is moved to P.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
• The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3 minutes.
● If a buzzer other than the hill-start assist control buzzer is sounding, the hill-start
assist control buzzer may not sound when the system is activated or canceled.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Pre-Collision System

When the radar sensor detects the possibility of a frontal collision, the precollision system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.

■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat belts only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 85)
However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the
VSC system is disabled.

■ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed. The system may not warn the driver using a warning light,
warning display and buzzer when the system detects and judges braking
operations.

■ Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the
driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system
determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically
applied to reduce the collision speed. Pre-collision braking can be disabled using the pre-collision braking off switch.

: If equipped
278

2-4. Using other driving systems

Disabling pre-collision braking
Pre-collision braking disabled
Pre-collision braking enabled
The pre-collision system warning
light turn on when pre-collision
braking is disabled.
2

When driving

Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehicles
or other obstacles on or near the
road ahead and determines
whether a collision is imminent
based on the position, speed, and
heading of the obstacles.

279

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belts (type A):

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (type B):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Pre-collision braking:
• The pre-collision braking off switch is not pressed.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle
running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).

280

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn

● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
● When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic struc-

ture to appear directly in the vehicle's line of travel

● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
● When passing through certain toll gates
● When driving on a bridge
● When passing through a tunnel

When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.

281

When driving

appears to be directly in the vehicle's line of travel

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be
occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly

The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system

When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the
sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system, or if the system is temporarily unus-

able

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 744, 754)

282

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Certification

283

When driving

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system

By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There
are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind
the following important points.
● Assisting the driver in watching the road

The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment

When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver in taking action

The pre-collision system's braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.

284

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations:
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-

ing of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage

compartment etc.)

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively:
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate
or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact,
always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.

285

When driving

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

2-4. Using other driving systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver in making the
decision to change lanes.
The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an
adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror
(the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off.

Outside rear view mirror indicator
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror
indicator on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated when a
vehicle is in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.

BSM indicator
When the system is on, the indicator will come on.

: If equipped
286

2-4. Using other driving systems

The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)
from the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

287

When driving

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side
of the vehicle is not in the detection
area

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when

The BSM main switch is set to on and vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph
(16 km/h)
■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle
● Another vehicle enters the vehicles detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles
and/or objects:
● Vehicles traveling from the opposite direction
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur

288

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following condi-

tions:
•
•
•
•

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall
etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following
vehicle.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your
vehicle enters the detection area

289

When driving

During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
When ice, mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the
road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away
from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area.
• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on.
• When towing a trailer
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase under the following conditions:

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult
to see.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning
message is displayed: (P. 754)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law : Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands : 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Output power : less than 20 milliwatts

290

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. The
system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause
an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to conditions, the system
may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety
is necessary.
One Blind Spot Monitor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear
bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can
function correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area

on the bumper clean at all times.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and
vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the

bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

291

When driving

■ Handling the radar sensor

2-5. Driving information

Utility vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of
off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle feature
● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause rollover.
CAUTION
■ Off-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious
injury or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle

gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

292

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of

gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down

is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways
much more easily than forward or backward.

Off-road driving

● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted
to travel.
● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.
● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
■ Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult
the following organizations.
● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
293

When driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of
areas to off-road vehicles.

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or serious
injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in

dangerous places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could

jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the rim.

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,

mud, water or snow.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that there is no

grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped to the underbody.
Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds,

jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

NOTICE
■ To prevent water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or
other components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality,

locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.

● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature

failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

294

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the stream for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake discs may affect braking effi-

ciency and may damage brake system components.

● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that

295

When driving

has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible.
● Be sure all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
296

2-5. Driving information

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P. 806)
Calculation formula for your vehicle

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your
vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb.
(kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C
lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A =Weight of people
*2: B =Total load capacity
*3: C =Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg)
get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D =Additional weight of people
*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load

297

When driving

Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (P. 806)

2-5. Driving information

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
● Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the

seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle in the
event of sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the items may

get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident:

• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

298

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for

passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in
the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total

■ Roof luggage carrier precautions (if equipped)

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or
more genuine Lexus cross rails or their equivalent.
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
● Place the cargo so that its weight is distrib-

Cross rails

uted evenly between the front and rear
axles.

● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed

Roof rails

the vehicle’s overall length or width.
(P. 806)

● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage car-

rier.

● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the

vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise the result may be a loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious
injury.

● If driving for long distances, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle

now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

● Do not exceed 165 lb. (75 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
● To reduce wind noise when there is no luggage loaded on the roof luggage car-

rier, move the front cross rail to the front-most position and the rear cross rail to
the rearmost position.

299

When driving

load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ When loading cargo

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

300

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR
(Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 806)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.

■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

When driving

■ TWR (Trailer weight rating): (P. 310, 806)
TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its
cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 693)

CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.

301

2-5. Driving information

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have
accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around
the tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.

302

2-5. Driving information

■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road
conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

When driving

Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size
is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
0.43 in. (10.8 mm) in width
Cross chain:
0.15 in. (3.9 mm) in diameter
1.00 in. (25.3 mm) in length
0.54 in. (13.8 mm) in width
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

303

2-5. Driving information

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after

driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires

being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,

or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-

tions that cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is

maintained.

304

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.

When driving
305

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance,
braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of
others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure
that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ
the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer
stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch
systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.
Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing
a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as towing kits, etc.

Towing related terms
■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum of
the total vehicle weight (including
the occupants, cargo and any
optional equipment installed on
the vehicle) and the weight of the
trailer being towed (including the
cargo in the trailer).

306

2-5. Driving information

■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehicle
weight is the total weight of the
vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is
the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
tongue weight.

Rear GAWR

307

When driving

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross axle
Front GAWR
weight. The gross axle weight is the
load placed on each axle (front
and rear).

2-5. Driving information

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
(With brakes)

The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the cargo
in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming base
vehicle with one driver, one front
passenger, towing package (if
available), hitch and hitch systems
(if required).
Additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight
rating so as not to exceed GCWR,
GVWR and GAWR.
If the gross trailer weight exceeds
3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to use a trailer with 2 or
more axles.

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for towing
(Without brakes)
a trailer without a trailer service
brake system.

308

2-5. Driving information

■ Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer hitch
ball. (P. 311)

● The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in the
table. (P. 310)
● The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR
described in the table. (P. 310)
● The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label.
● The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.
● If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control
device with sufficient capacity is required.

309

When driving

Weight limits

2-5. Driving information

GCWR, TWR, Unbraked TWR, Fifth wheel and Gooseneck towing TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.
■ GCWR* and TWR*
Towing type

Driving system

GCWR

2WD

7560 lb.
(3429 kg)

AWD

7650 lb.
(3470 kg)

2WD

9060 lb.
(4109 kg)

AWD

9150 lb.
(4150 kg)

Without towing package

With towing
package

TWR
2000 lb.
(907 kg)

3500 lb.
(1588 kg)

■ Unbraked TWR*
1000 lb. (453 kg)

*: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE J2807.

310

2-5. Driving information

Trailer Tongue Weight
● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of
trailers or towing as described below.
● To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be
loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight

Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle
to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front
fender height above the front axle before connection. Adjust weight
distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same
height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be
measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station,
building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

311

When driving

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100 =
9% to 11%)

2-5. Driving information

Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement
of your vehicle.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

312

2-5. Driving information

Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter

Trailer class

Typical trailer ball
size

2 5/16 in.

II and III

2 in.

1 7/8 in.

Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of
the lock washer and nut by at least
2 threads.

Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

313

When driving

Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.

2-5. Driving information

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
Weight carrying ball position:
45.1 in. (1145 mm)

Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the
rear end under body.

314

2-5. Driving information

■ Auto current cut-off function

In case of over current, the auto cut-off function stops the power flowing to the
trailer lights to prevent damage to the vehicle’s electrical system.
This function is activated when the rated current of any of the following trailer light
circuit components is exceeded:
● Tail lights: maximum 7.8 A
● Stop/turn signal light (right): maximum 4.5 A

● Stop/turn signal light (left): maximum 4.5 A

If a trailer light does not come on due to the activation of the auto current cut function, the light system will need to be reset.
Follow the reset procedure shown below.
● If a tail light does not come on, turn off the headlight switch.
● If the right-side stop/turn signal light does not come on, put the turn signal in the

off position or remove foot from the brake pedal.

● If the left-side stop/turn signal light does not come on, put the turn signal in the

off position or remove foot from the brake pedal.

If the emergency flashers do not operate, press the emergency flasher switch to
turn them off.
After the light system is reset, operate the light switches again to see if the lights
operate normally.
If the lights do not operate normally, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.

315

When driving

■ When the auto current cut function is activated

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an
accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:
● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
● Lexus recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104
km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your
trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing
vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases.
Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an
area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to
move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the
trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone
guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
316

2-5. Driving information

● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a
turn.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a
wider than normal turning radius.
● Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D.
● Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not
make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill
grades.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a
long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull
your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (P. 799)

317

When driving

● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your
trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

2-5. Driving information

● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
STEP 2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and
trailer’s wheels.
STEP 3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
STEP 4 Apply the parking brake firmly.
STEP 5 Shift into P and turn off the engine.
● When restarting after parking on a slope:
STEP 1

STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4

318

With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.

2-5. Driving information

■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch applies,
for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball
setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

Coupler
When driving

Trailer ball

■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 815)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-

tion.

● All trailer lights work as required by law.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is hitched.

Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight,
overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local

regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

319

2-5. Driving information

■ Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as
an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Lexus recommends that you
do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less
than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to

the additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner's Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)

● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately

600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

■ If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely
affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer should stabilize.
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is
beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing
vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
320

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the
trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch.
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.
■ To avoid accident or injury

● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.

sufficient capacity is required.

● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as

close to the trailer axle as possible.

● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed

limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest.
Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery
surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.

● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and

loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle

weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

● Do not use cruise control when towing.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do

not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descend-

ing steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden
downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the
brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could
cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

● Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

321

When driving

● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION
■ Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch
manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for
the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.
■ When towing a trailer

Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required.

Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s brak-

ing effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the

trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is
danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer
hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your
vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

322

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on
the ground.

When driving
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Active Torque Con-

trol 4WD system (AWD models)

2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from
the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with
any of the wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the transmission
and Active Torque Control 4WD system.

323

2-5. Driving information

324

Interior features

3
3-1. Lexus Display Audio
system
Lexus Display Audio
system..................................... 328
Display settings ...................... 332
Setup menu ............................. 334
Vehicle information............... 340
Mobile Assistant .................... 343
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system (with the Lexus
Display Audio system)....... 345
Automatic air conditioning
system (without a
navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio
system) ................................... 353
Rear window defogger
switch....................................... 361
Windshield wiper de-icer.... 363

325

3-4. Using the audio system

3-3. Using the Lexus Display
Audio system
Audio system (with the
Lexus Display Audio
system).................................... 365

Audio system (without a
navigation system or the
Lexus Display Audio
system) ................................... 480

Using the radio....................... 368

Using the radio ....................... 483

Using the CD player ............ 383

Using the CD player............. 492

Playing an audio CD and
MP3/WMA discs.............. 384

Playing MP3 and WMA
discs.......................................... 501

Listening to an iPod................ 394

Operating an iPod.................. 510

Listening to a USB
memory ................................. 402

Operating a USB
memory.................................. 520

Using the AUX port ............... 412

Bluetooth® audio system .... 530

Listening to Bluetooth®
audio......................................... 414

Using the Bluetooth®
audio system......................... 535

Optimal use of the audio
system ..................................... 428

Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player ... 540

Using the steering wheel
audio switches ..................... 430

Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player ... 544

Hands-free system
(for mobile phone)............... 433

Bluetooth® audio system
setup ........................................ 551

Using the Bluetooth®
phone ....................................... 441

Optimal use of the audio
system..................................... 552

Setting the hands-free
system ..................................... 459

Using the AUX port.............. 554

Bluetooth® settings ..............

472

Using the steering wheel
audio switches...................... 556
Hands-free system for
mobile phones...................... 560

326

Interior features
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phones)............. 565

3
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 609

Making a phone call .............. 573

Vanity mirrors .......................... 610

Setting a mobile phone......... 578

Clock............................................ 611

Security and system
setup....................................... 584

Outside temperature
display...................................... 613

Using the phone book.......... 588

Multi-display light control..... 615
Power outlets ............................ 616

3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..................... 595
• Interior lights ........................ 596
• Personal lights...................... 596
3-6. Using the storage
features
List of storage features......... 598
• Glove box .............................. 599
• Bottle holders/
door pockets........................ 600
• Cup holders ........................... 601
• Console box.......................... 604
• Coin holder ........................... 606
• Auxiliary boxes .................... 606
• Under tray ............................ 608

Heated steering wheel .......... 619
Seat heaters and
ventilators ............................. 620
Armrest .................................... 622
Coat hooks .............................. 623
Assist grips................................ 624
Floor mat .................................. 625
Luggage compartment
features................................... 627
Garage door opener ............ 632
Compass .................................. 638
Safety Connect ...................... 642

327

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Lexus Display Audio system
By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio system and hands-free system, etc.

■ Lexus Display Audio controller
Displaying the audio control
screen (P. 365)
Displaying the “Menu”
screen (P. 329)
Displaying the previous
screen
Turn or move the controller to
select a function, number and
screen button.
Push the controller to enter
the selected function, number and screen button.

: If equipped
328

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

■ “Menu” screen
To display the “Menu” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller.

Interior features

Button

Function

“Climate”

Automatic air conditioning system
(P. 345)

“Phone”

Hands-free system (P. 433)

“Car”

Vehicle information (P. 340)

“Setup”

Setup menu (P. 334)

“Display”

Display settings (P. 332)

329

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Lexus Display Audio system operation
■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
Select: Turn or move the controller.
Enter: Push the controller.

■ Basic screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through the
list.
: This indicator will turn on
when the list box is selected.

: To scroll to the next or
previous page.
: To return to the previous
screen.

330

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

■ When using the screen
● Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react

slowly.

● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be

operating slightly slower than normal.

● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.

Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display Settings”
screen (P. 332) or remove your sunglasses.

CAUTION
■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller

● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Lexus Display
● Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temper-

atures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE
■ To prevent the Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction
● Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food,

liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a
strange odor or stop functioning.

● Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or

strong impact as the controller may bend or break off.

● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the

Lexus Display Audio controller as this may cause it to stop functioning.

● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Lexus Display Audio con-

troller.

● If your hand or any object is on the Lexus Display Audio controller when the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Lexus
Display Audio controller may not operate properly.

331

Interior features

Audio controller as this may cause an injury.

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Display settings
You can adjust the contrast and brightness of the screen and also turn the
display off.
To display the “Display Settings” screen, press the “MENU” button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Display” on the “Menu”
screen.

Turn off screen
The screen is turned off. To turn
it on, press the “AUDIO” or
“MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller.

Changes to day mode.
(P. 332)
Adjust screen contrast/
brightness (P. 333)
Adjust screen contrast/
brightness of rear view monitor camera (P. 333)
Changing between day mode and night mode
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day
Mode”.
If the screen is set in day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
off.

332

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.
Adjust the display as desired using
“+” or “-”.
Select “Contrast” or “Brightness”
using the “<<” or “>>”.

“+”

“Contrast”

Weaker

Stronger

“Brightness”

Darker

Brighter

STEP 3

Interior features

“-”

Select “OK”.

333

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Setup menu
You can change the Lexus Display Audio system to your desired setting.
To display the “Setup” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Button

Page

“General”

P. 335

“Voice”

P. 339

“Bluetooth*”

P. 472

“Phone”

P. 459

“Audio”

P. 338

“Vehicle”

P. 337

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

334

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

General settings
This screen is used for various settings.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 334)
Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
Select language (P. 335)
Beep on/off
Select button color
Animation on/off
The animation effect for audio
source selection screen, screen
transitions, etc. can be set to “On”
or “Off”.

The selectable languages may differ depending on the model or
region.

335

Interior features

Personal data can be deleted.
(P. 336)
STEP 3 When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■ Selecting a language
STEP 1 Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select the desired language.
STEP 2

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

■ Delete personal data
STEP 1 Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Delete”.
STEP 2
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.

A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.
The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default settings.
STEP 3

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

336

Phonebook data
Call history data
Speed dial data
Bluetooth devices data
Phone sound settings
Detailed Bluetooth settings
Sound settings
Preset switch data
Last used radio station

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Vehicle settings
This screen is used for various vehicle settings.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 334)
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Vehicle customization settings
(P. 337)
Intuitive parking assist settings
(P. 252)
3

STEP 2

When you complete settings, select “Save”.

: If equipped
337

Interior features

■ Vehicle customization settings
Various setting can be changed.
STEP 1 Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Refer to the list of settings that can
be changed for details.
(P. 834)

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Audio settings
This screen is used for various audio settings.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 334)
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
HD Radio™ technology settings (P. 374)
iPod setting (P. 338)

■ iPod setting
This screen is used for iPod setting.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “iPod Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen. (P. 338)
Select “Display Cover Art”.
“On” or “Off” can be selected to
display captured image/iPod cover
art in the screen.

STEP 3

338

When you complete settings, select “OK”.

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Voice settings
This screen is used for guidance for Bluetooth® hands-free systems setting.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 334)
Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Voice guidance volume setting
Voice recognition prompts on/
off
Restore default settings
3

Interior features

STEP 4

When you complete settings, select “OK”.

339

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Vehicle information
This screen can be used to display the fuel consumption.
To display the “Trip Information” or “History” screen, press the “MENU”
button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Car” on the
“Menu” screen.

340

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Fuel consumption
■ Trip information
If the “Trip Information” screen does not appear, select “Trip
Information”.

■ History
If the “History” screen does not appear, select “History”.
Previous fuel economy record
Current fuel economy
Best recorded fuel economy
Update the past record data
Reset the past record data
“Trip
Information”
screen
appears
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

341

Interior features

Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
Cruising range
Previous fuel consumption per
minute
Current fuel consumption
Reset the trip information data
“History” screen appears
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

■ Updating the past record data

Selecting “Update” on the “History” screen will update the past record data.
Also, the average fuel consumption displayed in the multi-information display will
be reset at the same time.

342

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

Mobile Assistant
The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri Eyes Free mode via
the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible
cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via
Bluetooth. (P. 441)
STEP 1

Press and hold the off hook
switch until you hear the beeps
that indicate the system is listening.

The Mobile Assistant can be
used only when the neighboring
screen is displayed.
To cancel the Mobile Assistant,
select “Cancel”, or press and
hold the off hook switch.
To restart the Mobile Assistant
for additional commands, press
the off hook switch. Mobile
Assistant can only be restarted
after the system responds to a
voice command. After some
phone and music commands,
the Mobile Assistant feature will
automatically end to complete
the requested action.

343

Interior features

STEP 2

3-1. Lexus Display Audio system

■ Adjusting the volume

The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knob or
steering wheel volume switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are
synchronized.
■ Microphone

It is not necessary to speak directly into the
microphone when using the Mobile Assistant.

● Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant.
● The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations:

•
•
•
•
•
•

When spoken too quickly.
When spoken at a low or high volume.
When the roof or windows are open.
When passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used.
When the air conditioning system’s fan speed is set high.
When the air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone.

■ Mobile Assistant precautions
● The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version

installed on the connected device.

● Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an

unavailable function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available.

● If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth, an error

message will be displayed on the screen.

● While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used.
● If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio

source is Bluetooth audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction
prompts.

344

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system (with the Lexus Display Audio system)
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
To display the air conditioning operation screen, press the “MENU” button
on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Climate”.

■ Control panel

Air conditioning operation screen
Outside temperature display
3

Automatic
mode button

Windshield
defogger
button

Fan speed
control button

Driver's side temperature
control buttons

Air outlet
selector
button
Passenger's side temperature
control buttons

Outside/
recirculated
air
mode button

345

Interior features

“OFF” button

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Automatic air conditioning system control screen
Adjusting driver’s side temperature setting
Adjusting passenger’s side
temperature setting
Adjusting the fan speed
Selecting air outlet mode
Cooling and dehumidification function on/off
Dual mode on/off
Windshield wiper de-icer on/
off
Using the automatic air conditioning system
STEP 1

Press

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature
setting.
STEP 2

Press
or select
of the “TEMP” to increase the temperature and
or
to decrease the temperature.
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature
for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

■ Automatic mode indicator
If fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other
than that operated are maintained.

346

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the settings manually
■ Basic setting
STEP 1 To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan speed,
press
on
to increase the fan speed and
to
decrease the fan speed or select “” of
to increase the
fan speed and “” to decrease the fan speed.
Press
STEP 2

to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature setting, press
or select
“TEMP” to increase the temperature and
or
decrease the temperature.

of the
to

STEP 3

To change the air outlets, press
or select an air outlet
switch on the operation screen.
The air outlets used are switched
each time

is pressed. The

air flow shown on the display indicates the following:

347

Interior features

When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature
for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and
feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

348

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press

The mode switches between
(recirculated air mode) and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.

Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system operates automatically.

349

Interior features

Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

350

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Air conditioning system settings
● When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on, the air conditioning

system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was turned off.

● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic

key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.

● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer.
■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
Immediately after the button is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning

system is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning

system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations
where the windows need to be defogged.

351

Interior features

The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended
period.

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When outside air temperature is below 32F (0C)

The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when
on.

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into

and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.

352

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system)
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Air outlet display
Driver’s side temperature
display

Driver's side temperature
control buttons
Air outlet selector button

Passenger’s side temperature
display

Automatic
mode
button
“OFF”
button
Dual mode
button

Interior features

Fan speed
control
button

Fan speed display

Passenger’s side temperature control buttons

Cooling and dehumidification function
Windshield defogger
on/off button
button
Outside/recirculated air mode button

353

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic air conditioning system
STEP 1

Press

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature
setting.
STEP 2

Press

 on

to increase the temperature and

decrease the temperature.
When
is pressed (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

■ Automatic mode indicator
If fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other
than that operated are maintained.

354

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

STEP 2

To adjust the temperature setting, press
the temperature and

to increase

to decrease the temperature.

STEP 3

To change the air outlets, press

The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed. The
air flow shown on the display indicates the following:

Air flows to the upper body.

355

Interior features

When
is pressed (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air flows to the upper body and
feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press

The mode switches between
(recirculated air mode) and
side air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.

356

(out-

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front center outlets

Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

357

Interior features

Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

■ Air conditioning system settings
● When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned on, the air conditioning

system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was turned off.

● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic

key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.

● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer.
■ Using automatic mode

The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an extended
period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.

358

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning

system is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning

system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations
where the windows need to be defogged.
■ When outside air temperature is below 32F (0C)

The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when
pressed.
goes off

Press
to turn on the cooling and dehumidification function again. There may
be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light goes off again
shortly after the button is pressed. Have it inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into

and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

359

Interior features

■ When the indicator light on

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.

360

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window defogger switch
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops,
dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
Turns the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
on/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.

Interior features

Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
Turns the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
on/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.

361

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Operating conditions

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ The outside rear view mirror defoggers

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very
hot and burn you.

362

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Windshield wiper de-icer

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.

Select
to the windshield wiper de-icer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.

The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.

: If equipped
363

Interior features

Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio
system
Turns the windshield wiper deicer on/off

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Operating conditions

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars, as the
surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

364

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Audio system (with the Lexus Display Audio system)
To display the audio control screen, press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO”
button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.

Interior features

Title

Page

Using the radio

P. 368

Using the CD player

P. 383

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

P. 384

Listening to an iPod

P. 394

Listening to a USB memory

P. 402

Using the AUX port

P. 412

Listening to Bluetooth® audio

P. 414

Optimal use of the audio system

P. 428

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 430

365

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Switching the audio source
STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller to display the audio
control screen.
Select “Source” or press the
“AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller to display the
audio source selection screen.
Each time the “MEDIA” button is
pressed, an audio source other
than radio is changed to.
Each time the “RADIO” button is
pressed, radio mode is changed.

STEP 3

366

Select the desired audio source.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Using mobile phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

CAUTION
■ Certification

Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
3

Interior features

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.

367

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Using the radio
Press the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio
controller and then select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT”.

■ Control panel

Audio control screen

Mute button

Frequency adjustment knob

“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume

Seek/preset station
selector button
AM/FM/SAT mode buttons

368

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Audio control screen
Pressing the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
“Presets” screen

Interior features

“Options” screen

“Options” screen appears
Audio source selection
screen appears
Changing the Multicast Ch
Information in the music
under broadcasting is memorized
Selecting HD Radio™ technology
Setting the sound
(P. 428)
Displaying text messages
Scanning for receivable station
Preset stations
“Presets” screen appears
Selecting program type or
channel category
RBDS message display on/
off
Displaying traffic messages

369

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting a station
■ Seek tuning
Press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
■ Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob.
■ Preset stations
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or select desired preset
stations.
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations
(6 station per page  6 page) from any of the AM, FM or SAT bands.
STEP 1

STEP 2

Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL”
knob or pressing and holding “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button.
Select and hold one of the preset stations (1-6 every page).

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1

Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen. The radio will find the next station and
stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds
if “Analog” is selected (P. 374), and then scan again.

STEP 2

370

Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information. RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info”
indicator is on.
■ Selecting a desired type
STEP 1

Select “Options”.

Select “FM Info” to turn the indicator on.

371

Interior features

STEP 2

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 3

Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to select program types.
The type of program changes each time the button is selected.
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.

STEP 4

Select “TYPE SEEK”.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be
found, “no type” will appear on the
screen.

372

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Traffic announcement
Select “Traffic” on the “Options”
screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the
screen, and the radio will start
seeking any station broadcasting
traffic program information.
If no traffic program station is
found, “No Traffic” appears on the
screen.

HD Radio™ technology information

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

373

Interior features

HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio
product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free,
crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to
available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ HD Radio™ technology settings
STEP 1 Display the “Setup” screen. (P. 334)
STEP 2 Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “HD Radio Settings”.
STEP 3

STEP 4

Select “HD Radio/Analog Settings”.

Receiving both analog and digital broadcasts
Receiving only digital broadcasts
Receiving only analog broadcasts
STEP 5 When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■ Using HD Radio™ technology
Select “HD Radio” portion to turn
STEP 1
the indicator on.
The radio receiver will automatically tune from an analog signal to
a digital signal within 5 seconds.
An orange “HD)” logo indicator
will be displayed when in digital.
STEP 2

374

Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL”
knob or pressing and holding “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Selecting a desired type
STEP 1 Select “Options”.
STEP 2 Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE” to select program types.
The type of program changes each time the button is selected.
(P. 371)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
STEP 3

Select “TYPE SEEK”.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the
screen.

■ Displaying text information
Information such as the artist name, song title, album title and music
genre being listened to are displayed on the text screen.

Interior features

STEP 1

Select “Text”.

STEP 2

Select “Additional Information” to
display messages from the station.

375

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Changing the multiple or supplemental programs
On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have multiple or supplemental programs on one FM station.
Select “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is selected,
the
supplemental
program
changes.
If “Multicast” is selected when
tuned to the last of the supplemental programs, the main program
will be returned to.

■ Preserving tag information
Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system
and transmits to an iPod.
STEP 1

STEP 2

Select “Tag” to bookmark the
music information.

Connect iPod using an iPod cable.
(P. 394)
The music tag moves from the system into the iPod.
If tagging the music information fails, error message will be displayed
on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the
songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed.
Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album.

376

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ HD Radio™ technology troubleshooting guide
Experience

Cause

Action

Mismatch of time
alignment- a user
may hear a short
period of programming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.

The radio stations
analog and digital
volume is not properly aligned or the
station is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.

Reception issue, may clear-up
Radio is shifting
as the vehicle continues to be
Sound fades, blendbetween analog and
driven. Selecting “Analog” can
ing in and out.
digital audio.
force radio in an analog audio.
The radio does not
have access to digital signals at the
moment.

This is normal behavior, wait
until the digital signal returns. If
out of the coverage area, seek
a new station.

Interior features

Audio mute condition when an HD2/
HD3 multicast
channel had been
playing.

The digital multicast
content is not available until HD
Audio mute delay
This is normal behavior, wait
Radio™ broadcast
when selecting an
for the audio to become availcan be decoded
HD2/HD3 multiable.
cast channel preset. and make the audio
available. This takes
up to 7 seconds.
Text information
Data service issue
does not match the by the radio broadpresent song audio. caster.

Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experie
nces.

377

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Experience

Cause

No text information
Data service issue
shown for the
by the radio broadpresent selected
caster.
frequency.

Action
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experie
nces.

XM® Satellite Radio
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1 Press the “RADIO” button or select “SAT” on the audio source
selection.
STEP 2 Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired channel in
the all categories or press and hold “” or “” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired channel in the current category.
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Select and hold one of the preset stations
(1-6 every page).

378

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Changing the channel category
STEP 1

Select “Options”.

STEP 2

Select “TYPE ” or “TYPE”.
3

Interior features

■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
Scanning channels in the current category
STEP 1

Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.

Select “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is
reached.
■ Displaying the title and artist name
Select “Text”.
STEP 2

The screen will show up to 64
characters.

379

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ When the battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may

adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.

● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually

changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains and transmitters.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear spoiler and the rear window. To

maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other
metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ XM® Satellite Radio

An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
● XM® subscriptions

For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. 
Visit on the web at www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob, and the receiver's 8character ID number will appear.

● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

380

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

Message

SAT Check
Antenna

SAT No Signal

Loading
SAT Channel Off
Air

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the
XM antenna cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for
assistance.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose
“CH 000” and all free-to-air channels.

Interior features

SAT Ch Unauthorized

Explanation

The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. To listen to the
premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait
until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger
signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

381

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Message

Explanation

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action is
required.

SAT Chan
Unavailable

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada).
■ Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio

This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisee sous reserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage prejudiciable.

382

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Using the CD player

Audio control screen

Playback/
Pause button

Eject button

Interior features

“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume

Track/file selector
knob
Track/file selector button
Audio source selector button

Loading a disc
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
Ejecting a disc
Press

and remove the disc.

383

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
Insert a disc or press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the
Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “CD” with a disc inserted.

MP3/WMA disc

384

Audio source selection
screen appears
Displaying the track/file list
Select: Playing the previous
track/file
Select and hold: Reversing a
track/file
Pause
Select
to play
Select: Playing the next
track/file
Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a track/file
Repeat play
Random playback
Setting the sound
(P. 428)
Displaying the folder list

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks (Audio CD)
■ Selecting a track
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.

■ Selecting a track from audio control screen
Select
or
.
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold
beep.

until you hear a

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files (MP3/WMA disc)
■ Selecting a file
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired file number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.

■ Selecting a file from audio control screen
Select
or
.
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold
beep.

until you hear a
385

Interior features

■ Selecting a track from the track list
STEP 1 Select “Tracks” on the screen.
Select the desired track number.
STEP 2

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Selecting a file from the file list
STEP 1 Select “Files” on the screen.
Select the desired file number.

STEP 2

Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA disc)
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

386

Select “Folders” on the screen.
Select the desired folder number.

Select the desired file number.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Random playback
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:

Audio CD
: Random play on the disc
: Off
MP3/WMA disc
: Random play on the folder
3

: Random play in all the folders
Interior features

: Off
Repeat play
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:

Audio CD
: Track repeat
: Off
MP3/WMA disc
: File repeat
: Folder repeat
: Off
387

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed.
■ Error messages

If the following error messages appear on the screen, refer to the table and take the
appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
Message

Cause

Correction procedures

Check DISC

• The disc is dirty or
• Clean the disc.
damaged.
• Insert the disc cor• The disc is inserted
rectly.
upside down.
• Confirm the disc is
• The disc is not playable playable with the
with the player.
player.

DISC Error

There is a malfunction
within the system.

No music files found.

This indicates that no
playable data is included Eject the disc.
in the disc.

Eject the disc.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If disc is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

Disc may be damaged and may not play properly.
388

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)
● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.

389

Interior features

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
UDF (2.01 or lower)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed
correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

390

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback

391

Interior features

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.

(12 cm)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs

● CDs with a transparent or translucent

recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off

392

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

NOTICE
■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

Interior features
393

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “iPod” with an iPod connected.

■ Connecting an iPod
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it
is not turned on.

394

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Control panel

Audio control screen

Playback/
Pause button
3

Interior features

“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume

Song selector knob
Song selector button
Audio source selector button

395

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection
screen appears
Selecting the play mode
Displaying the song list
Select: Playing the previous
song
Select and hold: Reversing a
song
Pause
Select
to playback
Select: Playing the next song
Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a song
Repeat play
Shuffle play
Setting the sound (P. 428)

396

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting a play mode
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired play mode by
selecting the “Playlists”, “Artists”,
“Albums”, “Songs”, “Podcasts”,
“Audio books”, “Genres” or “Composers” tabs.

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing songs

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.

■ Selecting a song from audio control screen
Select
or
.
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold
beep.

until you hear a

■ Selecting a song from the list
STEP 1 Select “Songs” on the screen.
STEP 2

Select the desired song.

397

Interior features

■ Selecting one song at a time
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired song.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Shuffle play
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Playing the songs in shuffle
: Playing the albums in the iPod in shuffle
: Off

When a large number of songs is stored in an iPod, shuffle selection may take
time.

Repeat play
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Repeating the song
: Off

398

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ About iPod

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with

safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

■ iPod cover art
● Depending on the iPod and songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
● This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 338)
● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated

while the cover art display is in process.

● Only iPod cover art that is saved in a JPEG format can be displayed.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the

iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may

not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to
a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve the problem.

● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own con-

trols. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead.

● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so,

charge the iPod before use.

● Supported models (P. 400)
399

Interior features

● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your
iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■ Error messages

“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to
connect the iPod.”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“There are no songs available for playback. Please load compatible media to your
iPod.”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
■ Compatible models

The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices
can be used with this system.
● Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.

400

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ If the armrest cannot be fully closed

Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the
armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may
damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become

high, resulting in damage to the player.

nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-

minal.

401

Interior features

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Listening to a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “USB” with a USB memory connected.

■ Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.

402

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Control panel

Audio control screen

Playback/
Pause button
3

Interior features

“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume

File selector knob
File selector button
Audio source selector button

403

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection
screen appears
Displaying the folder list
Displaying the file list
Select: Playing the previous
file
Select and hold: Reversing a
file
Pause
Select
to playback
Select: Playing the next file
Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a file
Repeat play
Random playback
Setting the sound (P. 428)

404

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing files
■ Selecting one file at time
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired file.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.

■ Selecting a file from audio control screen
Select
or
.
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold
beep.

until you hear a
3

■ Selecting a file from the list
STEP 1 Select “Files” on the screen.

Interior features

STEP 2

Select the desired file number.

405

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting a folder
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “Folders” on the screen.
Select the desired folder number.

Select the desired file number.

STEP 3

Random playback
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Random play on the folder
: Random play in all the folders
: Off

406

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Repeat play
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: File repeat
: Folder repeat
: Off

■ USB memory functions

● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device

● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and

reconnected, format the memory.

■ Error messages for USB memory

“Connection error. Please consult your Owner’s Manual for instructions on how to
connect the USB device.”:
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“No compatible audio files found. Please add compatible files to your USB device.”:
This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.

407

Interior features

itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting
it once again may resolve the problem.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ USB memory
● Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
● Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 HS (480Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed
correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This
format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.

408

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

409

Interior features

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and
the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result.
In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls.

410

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

NOTICE
■ If the armrest cannot be fully closed

Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as
this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
■ To prevent damage to USB memories
● Do not leave USB memories in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle

may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it

is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory

or its terminal.

Interior features
411

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.

AUX port
STEP 3

Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller and then select “AUX”.

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.

412

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ If the armrest cannot be fully closed

Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to
the system, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the
armrest as this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.
■ To prevent damage to portable audio device
● Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio

device or its terminal.

413

Interior features

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Listening to Bluetooth® audio

The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a portable player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication. This
audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not
support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “Bluetooth*”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Control panel

Audio control screen

Playback/
Pause button

“PWR·VOL” knob
Power Volume

Track selector knob
Track selector button
Audio source selector button

414

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Audio control screen
Pressing the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any
screens of the selected source.
Audio source selection
screen appears
Displaying the list
Connecting a Bluetooth®
audio player
Displaying the track list
Select: Playing the previous
track
Select and hold: Reversing a
track
Playback
Pause
Select: Playing the next track
Select and hold: Fast-forwarding a track
Repeat play
Random playback
Setting the sound (P. 428)
Some titles and controls may
not be displayed depending on
the type of portable audio
player.

Interior features
415

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the screen.
Connection status
Battery charge

Indicators
Connection status
Battery charge

416

Conditions
Good
Full

Not connected
Empty

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Registering a Bluetooth® audio player
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to register your portable
audio player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music
on the vehicle’s audio system.
You can register up to 5 devices in the system.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
Select “Connect”.

Interior features

STEP 3

Select “Yes”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

417

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 4

Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your portable
audio player.
For the operation of the portable
audio player, see the manual that
comes with your portable audio
player.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the device, you may need to
select “Yes” to register, or “No” to
cancel on your Bluetooth® device.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.

418

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting the Bluetooth® audio player
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
Select “Connect”.

Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering
Bluetooth® device. (P. 473)

The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

419

Interior features

STEP 3

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Connecting the Bluetooth® audio player
There are two connection methods available.
■ When the connection method is set to “From Vehicle”
When the portable audio player is on standby for the connection, it will
be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the connection method is set to “From Audio Player”
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio
system.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
Select “Connect”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 3

Select the device to connect.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.

420

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.

■ Selecting a track from audio control screen
Select
or
.
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold
beep.

until you hear a
3

■ Selecting a track from the list
From “Tracks”

STEP 2

Interior features

STEP 1

Select “Tracks” on the screen.
Select the desired track.

421

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

From “Browse”
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “Browse” on the screen.
Select the desired item.
Continue to select the applicable
screen button until its track list is
displayed.

Select the desired track.

STEP 3

Random playback
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Random play on the album
: Random play in all the album
: Off

422

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Repeat play
Each time

is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Track repeat
: Album repeat
: Off

■ When using the Bluetooth® audio system

● In the following conditions, the system may not function.

● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system,

operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

■ Bluetooth® antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the seat or
in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player, and this system does not have a charging function.

423

Interior features

• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
• If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
• If metal is covering or touching the portable player
● There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth®
audio play.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Compatible models

Portable audio players must correspond to the specifications.
● Bluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)

● Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sounds to the headphone.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable audio player.

424

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system

FCC ID: AJDK046
IC ID: 775E-K046
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
■ Reconnecting the portable audio player

If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions
below to reconnect:
● Select the portable audio player again
● Enter the portable audio player
■ When you release your car

Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 336)

425

Interior features

If the portable audio player is disconnected with a poor reception when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the
system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20
cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités
: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente
(p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.

426

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable car-

diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

427

Interior features

than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Optimal use of the audio system
Select
on the audio control screen to adjust the sound
settings.

“Sound” tab
Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass to
a level between -5 to 5.
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance to a level between
Front 7 and Rear 7.
Select “L” or “R” to adjust
the left/right audio balance
to a level between L7 and
R7.
“DSP” tab
Surround on/off
Automatic sound levelizer
(ASL) on/off

428

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed.

Interior features
429

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.

Press: Turns the power on,
selects audio source
Press and hold: Pause or
mute
Increases/decreases
volume
Radio mode:
Selects radio stations
CD mode:
Selects tracks/files and
folders (MP3/WMA)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode:
Selects files and folders
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects tracks and albums
Turning the audio system on
To turn the audio system on, press the “MODE” switch.

430

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Changing the audio source
Press the “MODE” switch when the audio system is turned on. The audio
source changes as follows each time the “MODE” switch is pressed. If no
discs are inserted in the player, or if the external device is not connected,
that mode will be skipped.
FMSATCD playeriPod or USB memory
Bluetooth® audioAUXAMFM

Adjusting the volume
Press “+” to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the volume.
Hold the button in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Interior features

Silencing a sound
Press and hold the “MODE” switch.
To cancel, press and hold the “MODE” switch.

Selecting a radio station
STEP 1

Press the “MODE” switch to select the radio mode.

STEP 2

Press “” or “” on

to select a radio station.

To seek stations, press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a

beep.

431

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1

Press the “MODE” switch to select the CD, Bluetooth® audio,
iPod or USB memory mode.

STEP 2

Press “” or “” on

to select the desired track/file or song.

Selecting a folder or album
STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the “MODE” switch to select the CD (only when MP3/
WMA disc is in use), Bluetooth® audio or USB memory mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

432

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Hands-free system (for mobile phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that
allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and
make/receive calls.

■ Telephone switch
Volume switch
During an incoming call:
Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call:
Adjusts the receiver volume

Off hook switch
• Sending
• Receiving
• “Phone” screen display
On hook switch
• End call
• Refuse call
Talk switch
Press: Turns the voice command system on
Press and hold: Turns the
voice command system off

433

Interior features

The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Microphone
You can use the microphone
when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the front
speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (P. 442)

434

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength

Indicators

Battery charge

Good
Full

Call area
Signal strength

Not connected
Empty
“Rm”: Roaming area

Excellent

Poor

435

Interior features

Connection status

Conditions

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system is muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may
deteriorate and connecting condition may go down.

● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

•
•
•
•
•

When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
If a window is open
If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
There is an effect from the network of the mobile phone

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the mobile phone is turned off
● If you are outside service range
● If the mobile phone is not connected
● If the mobile phone’s battery is low
● When outgoing is controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.
● When the mobile phone itself cannot be used
● When transferring the phonebook data from the mobile phone
■ Bluetooth® antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

436

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Battery charge/Signal status
● This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
● This system does not have a charging function.
● The Bluetooth® phone battery will burn quickly when it is connected to

Bluetooth®.

● When the mobile phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed.
● When you are out of service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No

service” is displayed.

■ When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.
● The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
● Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.

■ About the phonebook in this system

● Phonebook data
● Call history date
● Speed dial

When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■ When you release your car

Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 336)
■ About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

437

Interior features

The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Compatible models

This system supports the following service.
● Bluetooth® Specification:

Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)

● Profiles:

• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or
higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using the mobile phone or
head sets. It has an outgoing and incoming call function.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher
This is a profile to exchange phonebook data. When the Bluetooth® phone
has PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. You need to take OPP or PBAP service individually.
■ Certification for the hands-free system

438

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated
power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente
(p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.

439

Interior features

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités
: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable car-

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to mobile phones

Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.

440

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Using the Bluetooth® phone

Interior features

Device name
Bluetooth® connection status (P. 435)
Dialing from history (P. 450)
Speed dialing (P. 450)
Dialing from the phonebook (P. 448)
Dialing by inputting a number (P. 447)
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone (P. 444)
To display the screen shown above, press
on the steering wheel or
press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and
then select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.

441

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Registering a Bluetooth® phone
To use the hands-free system, you must register a Bluetooth® phone in
the system. You can register up to 5 phones in the system.
STEP 1
STEP 2

442

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Yes”.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 3

Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
mobile phone.
Depending on the type of phone,
further phone operations may be
required after inputting the passcode (for example to confirm if
connection is to be received or
not) when registering a phone.

If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.

443

Interior features

Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the phone, you may need to
select “Yes” to register, or “No” to
cancel on your mobile phone.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting the Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Connect Phone”.

Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering
Bluetooth® device. (P. 473)

The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
When the system cannot get the
device names, alternate names will
be displayed such as “Device1”,
“Device2”, etc.

444

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Connecting a Bluetooth® phone
There are two connecting methods available-automatic and manual.
Automatic
When you register your phone, auto connection will be activated. Always
set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where connection can be established.
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, the system will search for a nearby mobile phone
you have registered.
The system automatically connects with the most recent phone that was
connected. The connected result is displayed.

445

Interior features

Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be required (to
confirm if connection is to be received or not) even when automatically
connected.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off
(P. 478), you must connect Bluetooth® manually.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Connect Phone”.

STEP 3

Select the device to connect.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.

■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.
■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
● Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
● It may take time to connect.

446

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■ Dialing
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Dial” on the “Phone” screen.
Input the phone number.
STEP 3
To delete the inputted phone
number, select
.
For the first digit, you can enter “+”
by selecting “” for a while.

Press

on the steering wheel or select

Depending on the type of phone, when internet communication functions such as skype are available, phone operations (selecting between
normal phone communication or internet communication) may be necessary after dialing operations are performed.

447

Interior features

STEP 4

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
mobile phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up
to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook.
(P. 462)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data to call
from the list.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed. (P. 449)

STEP 4

448

Choose the number and then
press
on the steering wheel or
select
.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● When the phonebook is empty
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your mobile phone does not support either PBAP or OPP service, you cannot transfer contacts.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed.
3

449

Interior features

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone
STEP 3 Select “Yes” if you want to transfer new contacts from a mobile
phone.
Select “No” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.
Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be necessary when transferring contacts by PBAP.
For PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth® phone
STEP 3 Select “Transfer” if you want to transfer new contacts from a
mobile phone.
Select “Cancel” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.
You need to operate your phone to transfer new contacts.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired number to make a call.

■ Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: all the calls below which were memorized
“Missed”: calls which you missed
“Incoming”: calls which you received
“Outgoing”: calls which you called
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

450

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and choose
the desired data from the list.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 4

Press
select

on the steering wheel or
.

■ Calling using voice recognition
Calls can be made by giving a voice command.
STEP 1

STEP 2

Voice prompts on/off
Voice commands
Voice commands are marked
with
.
Canceling voice recognition
system

451

Interior features

Press the talk switch.
To cancel voice recognition press and hold the talk switch.
Following the system guidance,
wait for the beep, and then say the
desired voice commands.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● Dial by name
The procedure below shows “Call ” or “Call at ”.
Follow similar procedures for the other operations.
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

Press the talk switch.
Say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a registered
contact.
Say “Dial” or press
on the
steering wheel.
Say or select “Go Back” to return
to the previous screen.

■ Call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone-

book, the name is displayed in the call history.

● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is dis-

played in the call history.

■ When driving

The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(only the 6th page of “All” tab) are unavailable.
■ International calls

Depending on the mobile phone in use, you may not be able to make international
calls.
■ Calling by using the latest call history item
STEP 1 Press

on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.

STEP 2 Press

on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.

STEP 3 Press

on the steering wheel to select the latest history item.

STEP 4 Press

on the steering wheel or select

item.
452

to call the latest history

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Voice guidance function
● Voice guidance for the voice recognition system can be skipped by pressing the

talk switch.

● When “Voice Prompts (on/off)” is selected, voice recognition will be tempo-

rarily suspended. Press the talk switch again.

● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting

when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk
switch.

■ Using voice command
● Using voice command “Call ” or “Call at ”

453

Interior features

• In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Call ” or “Call
at ”, after saying “Call” say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”, “Mary Davis”, “at”, “Mobile”
• There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Work and Other.
• Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized.
Change names in the phonebook to full names.
• Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed.
After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
• When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name
candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.
• When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a
candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from
the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number from the
candidate list.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● Using voice command “Dial ”

• In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Dial ”, after
saying “Dial” say the phone number.
• Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is 2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty seven eight”
• The system can recognize the following types of the phone numbers:
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)
• As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number without stopping.
• When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not
displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number
from the candidate list.
● Using voice command “International call”.
Up to 20 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized.
■ When using voice recognition

Speak clearly when using the voice recognition, otherwise the system may not correctly recognize your voice. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize your voice.

454

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
To answer the phone:
• Press
• Select

on the steering wheel.
.

■ To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or volume knob.
■ International calls

Depending on the cellular phone in use, received international calls may not be displayed correctly.

455

Interior features

■ To refuse a call
Press
on the steering wheel or select

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

■ To adjust the receiver volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or the volume knob.
■ To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.
■ Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
STEP 1
STEP 2

456

Select “0-9”.
Input the number.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 3

If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phone book, “Send”
and “Exit” are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p or
w, that come after the phone number. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1 )

STEP 4

Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”.
If you select “Exit”, this function will end.

■ To hang up
Press
on the steering wheel or select

457

Interior features

■ To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from Hands-free call to mobile
phone call.
Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from mobile phone call to Handsfree call.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming
call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
• Press
• Select

on the steering wheel.
.

To refuse the call:
• Press
on the steering wheel.
• Select
.
Every time you press
on the steering wheel or select
during
call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
■ Transferring calls
● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the mobile phone while driving.
● If you transfer from the mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will

be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

● Transfer method and operate may vary according to the mobile phone used.
● For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■ Call waiting operation

Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and mobile
phone.

458

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Setting the hands-free system
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.

STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

459

Interior features

Setting the sound
Phonebook settings
To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Setting the sound
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 459)
Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Changes the speaker volume
(P. 460)
Changes the ring tone volume
(P. 460)
Changes the ring tone
(P. 461)
Restore default settings

When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■ Setting the volume
STEP 1 Select “Call Volume” or “Ring Tone Volume” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.
Select “-” or “+” to lower or raise
STEP 2
the volume, and then “OK”.
STEP 4

460

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Setting the ring tone
STEP 1 Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen.
Select “Tone1”, “Tone2” or “Tone3”
STEP 2
to change the ring tone, and then
“OK”.

Interior features
461

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Phonebook settings
The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phones in total. The data for
1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each
phonebook.

Managing the contacts
Managing the speed dials
Deleting the call history
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
STEP 1
STEP 2

462

Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 459)
Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Managing the contacts
● Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth phone to the
system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible Bluetooth phones. If your mobile phone does not support
either PBAP or OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Transfer Contacts”.
3

Interior features

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth phones
STEP 4

Automatic phonebook download on/off
The phonebook data can be automatically transferred.
Depending on the mobile phone,
call history will be also transferred.

Update phonebook
The phonebook data can be
updated.

Restore default settings

463

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

For PBAP incompatible Bluetooth phones
Replace contacts
STEP 4
The phonebook data can be
replaced.

Add contacts
The phonebook can be added.

● Deleting the phonebook data
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Delete Contacts”.
If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download
Contacts” setting needs to be set
to “Off”. (P. 463)

STEP 4

Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.

STEP 5

464

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Phonebook data

Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
■ Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
STEP 4 Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

■ When transferring a phone number

Transfer the phone number while engine is running.
If your mobile phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input “1234” by
your mobile phone for OBEX certification.
● If your mobile phone does not support PBAP service, you cannot use this func-

tion.

● If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook data

without operating your phone.

■ When you have selected “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contacts” to transfer the

phone number

If your mobile phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these functions. You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
■ Transferring the phone number in a different way (To display the “Transfer

Contacts” screen)

STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.

■ Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth audio is playing

Bluetooth audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer
finishes. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.

465

Interior features

■ When you have selected “Update Contacts” to transfer the phone number

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Deleting the phonebook data in a different way
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Choose the desired data from the list.
STEP 4 Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
STEP 5 Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen.
STEP 6 A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select

“Yes”.

If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download Contacts” setting
needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 463)
When you delete a Bluetooth phone, the phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.

■ Managing the speed dials
● Registering the speed dial from contacts
You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to 18
numbers per phone can be registered.
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

466

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462)
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Select “New Speed Dial from
Contacts”.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 4

Choose the data to register.

STEP 5

Select the desired phone number.

Select the switch you want to register the number in.

STEP 7

If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.

467

Interior features

STEP 6

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● Registering the speed dial from call history
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

STEP 4

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462)
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Select “New Speed Dial from Call History” on the “Speed Dials”
screen.
Choose the data to register.

STEP 5

Select the switch you want to register the number in.

STEP 6

If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.

468

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

● Deleting the speed dial
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462)
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings”
screen.
Select “Delete Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.

■ Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.

■ Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Contacts” screen)
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
STEP 4 Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen.

469

Interior features

STEP 5

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
STEP 4 Select “Contacts” or “History” to set new speed dial.

Select “Cancel” to cancel it.

STEP 5 Choose the desired data from the list.
STEP 6 Select the desired phone number.

■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact” screen)
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Choose the desired data from the list.
STEP 4 Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
STEP 5 Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen.
STEP 6 Select the desired telephone number.
STEP 7 Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from “STEP6”

(P. 466).
■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Call History” screen)
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Choose the desired data from the list.
STEP 4 Select “Add Speed Dial” on the “Call History” screen.
STEP 5 Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from call history” from

“STEP5”. (P. 468)

470

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Deleting the call history
STEP 1 Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 462)
STEP 2 Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
If your phone supports PBAP service, the “Automatically Download
Contacts” setting needs to be set to “Off”. (P. 463)

Choose the desired history to
delete.

STEP 3

STEP 5

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.

■ Deleting call history in a different way
STEP 1 Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 441)
STEP 2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
STEP 3 Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.
STEP 4 Follow the steps “Deleting the call history” from “STEP4”. (P. 471)

471

Interior features

Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.

STEP 4

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Bluetooth® settings

You can set the Bluetooth system to your desired settings.

Registered devices settings
Connecting telephone
Connecting audio player
Detailed Bluetooth settings
To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

472

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Registered devices settings
■ Registering a Bluetooth device
Bluetooth devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable audio
players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to 5
Bluetooth devices.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472)
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select “Add New”.
3

Interior features

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

473

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 4

When this screen is displayed,
input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your Bluetooth
device.
For the operation of the
Bluetooth® device, see the manual
that comes with your Bluetooth®
device.
Depending on the type of phone,
further phone operations may be
required after inputting the passcode (for example to confirm if
connection is to be received or
not) when registering a phone.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure
Simple
Pairing)
compatible Bluetooth® devices.
Depending on the phone, you may
need to select “Yes” to register, or
“No” to cancel on your mobile
phone.
If you want to cancel it, select
“Cancel”.
If a completion message is
displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.

■ Removing a Bluetooth device
STEP 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472)
STEP 2 Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

474

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

STEP 3

Select “Remove”.

STEP 4

Select the device to remove.

STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472)
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select “Details”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

475

Interior features

A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to remove
the device.
■ Displaying a Bluetooth device details
You can confirm and change the device details.
STEP 5

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Select the device.

STEP 4

STEP 5

Following screen is displayed:
Display device name
Display device address
Display your telephone number
Depending on the model of the
phone, the number may not be
displayed.

Display compatibility profile of
the device
Change connection method
(P. 476)
Restore default settings
STEP 6 When you complete settings, select “OK”.
● Changing connection method
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “Connection Method” on the “Device Details” screen.
Select “From Vehicle” or “From
Audio Player”.
“From Vehicle”: Connect the audio
system to the portable audio
player.
“From Audio Player”: Connect the
portable audio player to the audio
system.

476

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Selecting the Bluetooth phone
If multiple Bluetooth devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472)
Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select the device to connect.

STEP 3

Selecting the audio player
If multiple Bluetooth devices are registered, follow the procedure
below to select the Bluetooth device to be used. You may only use one
device at a time.
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472)
Select “Connect Audio Player” on the “Bluetooth* Settings”
screen.
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a
Bluetooth device. (P. 473)
The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth mark is displayed
when you connected the device.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
477

Interior features

“Add New”: Registering a
Bluetooth device. (P. 473)
The selection indicator is displayed
on left side of the selected device
name.
The Bluetooth mark is displayed
when you connected the device.

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

Detailed Bluetooth settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth settings.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 472)
Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth*
Settings” screen.
Following screen is displayed:
Change Bluetooth power on/
off
You can change Bluetooth function to “On” or “Off”

Display device name
Change passcode (P. 479)
Display device address
Restore default settings
Display compatibility profile of
the system
Change displaying telephone
status on/off
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting telephone

Change displaying audio player
status on/off
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting audio player
STEP 4

When you complete settings, select “Save”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

478

3-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system

■ Editing the passcode
You can change the passcode that you use to register your Bluetooth
device in the system.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Input a passcode, and select “OK”.
To delete the inputted phone
number, select
.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Interior features
479

3-4. Using the audio system

Audio system (without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system)
CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type A)

480

3-4. Using the audio system

CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type B)

Page

Using the radio

P. 483

Using the CD player

P. 492

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

P. 501

Operating an iPod

P. 510

Operating a USB memory

P. 520

Interior features

Title

Bluetooth audio system

P. 530

Optimal use of the audio system

P. 552

Using the AUX port

P. 554

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 556

Hands-free system for mobile phones

P. 560

481

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Using mobile phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

CAUTION
■ Certification
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● This product is a class 1 laser product classified under the Safety of laser products,

IEC 60825-1:2007, and contains a class 1 M laser module. To ensure continued
safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the
product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

CAUTION - CLASS 1 M INVISIBLE LASER
RADIATION WHEN OPEN, DO NOT
VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS.

NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

482

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the radio
Type A

Channel category button

Preset station buttons

Frequency adjustment
(AM/FM mode) and
channel (SAT mode)
AMFM/SAT
knob
mode buttons
Traffic information button
Seek button
Radio text message button
Scan button

483

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

3-4. Using the audio system

Type B

Channel category button

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

Frequency adjustment
knob
AMFM buttons
Seek button

484

Preset station buttons

Traffic information button
Radio text message button
Scan button

3-4. Using the audio system

Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1

Search for the desired stations by turning
or “” on

STEP 2

or pressing “”

Press and hold the button (from
be set to until you hear a beep.

) the station is to

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1

Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
Interior features

When the desired station is reached, press the button again.
■ Scanning all the radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2

All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, press the button again.

485

3-4. Using the audio system

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RBDS broadcasts
STEP 1 Press “” or “” on

during FM reception.

The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.

●“ROCK”
●“EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
●“CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
●“R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
●“INFORM” (Information)
●“RELIGION”
●“MISC” (Miscellaneous)
●“ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RBDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
STEP 2

Press

, or “” or “” on

The radio seeks or scans for stations of the relevant program type.

486

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Displaying radio station names
Press
.
■ Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
A text message is displayed when “MSG” is shown on the screen.
If the text continues past the end of the display,
hold
until you hear a beep.

is displayed. Press and

XM® Satellite Radio (type A)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press
.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
“SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3”

STEP 2

Turn

to select the desired channel in all the categories or

press “” or “” on
to select the desired channel in
the current category.
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from
to
) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep.
■ Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on

487

Interior features

STEP 1

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Scanning the XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning the channels in the current category
Press
.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
● Scanning the preset channels
STEP 1

Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
■ Displaying text information
Press
.
STEP 1

The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
● CH NAME
● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
● CH NUMBER

488

3-4. Using the audio system

■ When the battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may

adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.

● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually

changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains and transmitters.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear spoiler and the rear window. To

maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other
metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio

● XM® subscriptions

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem.
Select “CH000” using

, and the receiver's 8-character ID number will

appear.
● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

489

Interior features

An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.

3-4. Using the audio system

■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

“ANTENNA”

The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all the free-to-air channels.

“UNAUTH”

“NO SIGNAL”

“LOADING”
“OFF AIR”

490

The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

3-4. Using the audio system

“-----”

“CH UNAVL”

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada).
■ Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio

This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.

491

Interior features

Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisee sous reserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage prejudiciable.

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the CD player
Type A

Repeat play button

Playback/Pause button

Eject
button
Load
button
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

Text button
Search playback button
Playback button
Random playback button
CD selector button
Track selector button

492

3-4. Using the audio system

Type B

Repeat play button

Playback/Pause button

Eject
button
3

Interior features

Load
button
“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

Text button
Search playback button
Playback button
Random playback button
CD selector button
Track selector button

493

3-4. Using the audio system

Loading a CD
■ Loading a CD
STEP 1 Press
.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being inserted.

STEP 3

When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert
the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel the operation, press
. If you do not insert a disc within 15
seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

494

3-4. Using the audio system

Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
To select the CD to be ejected,
press “” or “” on
.

STEP 1

The selected disc number is shown
on the display.

Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press “” to move up or “” to move down using
the desired track number is displayed.

until

■ Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
■ Scanning tracks
STEP 1 Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2

again.

Press the button again when the desired track is reached.

495

Interior features

Press
and remove the CD.
■ Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
STEP 2

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting a CD
■ Selecting a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on
■ Scanning loaded CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold

until you hear a beep.

The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press
STEP 2

again.

Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.

Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press

Random playback
■ Current CD
Press
.
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press

■ All CDs
Press and hold

again.

until you hear a beep.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press

496

again.

3-4. Using the audio system

Repeat play
■ Repeating a track
Press
.
To cancel, press

again.

■ Repeating all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display
Press

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding
until you hear a
beep enables to display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been operated for more
than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.

497

Interior features

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  CD title  Track title

3-4. Using the audio system

■ When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:

This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside
the player. Wait for a while and then press
. If the CD still cannot
be played back, contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.
■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-

ods of time

The discs may be damaged and may not play properly.

498

3-4. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

(12 cm)

3
● Low-quality and deformed CDs

Interior features
● CDs with a transparent or translucent

recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off

499

3-4. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ CD player precautions

500

3-4. Using the audio system

Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Repeat play button
Disc selector button

Playback/Pause button
Folder selector buttons

Eject button

Load button
3

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

File selector knob
Text button
Search playback button
Playback button
Random playback button
File selector button

501

3-4. Using the audio system

Type B
Repeat play button
Disc selector button

Playback/Pause button
Folder selector buttons

Eject button

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

502

Load button

File selector knob
Text button
Search playback button
Playback button
Random playback button
File selector button

3-4. Using the audio system

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 494, 495
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 496
Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting a folder one at a time
Press
or
to select the desired folder.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.

Interior features

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.

503

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting a file
Turn

or press “” or “” on

to select the desired

file.
■ Scanning the files in a folder
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press

again.

When the desired file is reached, press

again.

Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press

Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
.
To cancel, press

again.

■ Playing all the files from a disc in random order
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press

504

again.

3-4. Using the audio system

Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
.
To cancel, press

again.

■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display
Press

505

Interior features

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Folder no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title
(MP3 only)  Track title  Artist name

3-4. Using the audio system

■ CD player protection feature

P. 497
■ Display

P. 497
■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside
the player. Wait for a while and then press
. If the CD still cannot be
played back, contact your Lexus dealer.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used

P. 498
■ Lens cleaners

P. 498
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-

ods of time
P. 498

506

3-4. Using the audio system

■ MP3 and WMA files

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.

507

Interior features

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility

3-4. Using the audio system

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used:

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

508

3-4. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback

NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

P. 499
■ CD player precautions

P. 500

509

Interior features

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

3-4. Using the audio system

Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting an iPod
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it
is not turned on.

510

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Control panel
Type A
Playback/Pause button
Go back button
Repeat play button

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

iPod menu/
Song selector knob
Text button
Playback button
Shuffle playback button
Song selector button

511

3-4. Using the audio system

Type B
Playback/Pause button
Go back button
Repeat play button

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

iPod menu/
Song selector knob
Text button
Playback button
Shuffle playback button
Song selector button

512

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting a play mode

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Turning

to select iPod menu mode.
changes the play mode in the following order:

“PLAYLISTS”“ARTISTS”“ALBUMS”“SONGS”
“PODCASTS”“GENRES”“COMPOSERS”
“AUDIOBOOKS”
3
STEP 3

Press

to select the desired play mode.
Interior features
513

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Play mode list
Play mode

First
selection

Second
selection

Third
selection

Fourth
selection

“PLAYLISTS”

Playlists select Songs select

“ARTISTS”

Artists select

“ALBUMS”

Albums select Songs select

“SONGS”

Songs select

Albums select Songs select
-

“PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select
“GENRES”

Genre select

Artists select

“COMPOSERS”

Composers
select

Albums select Songs select

“AUDIOBOOKS” Songs select

Albums select Songs select

■ Selecting a list
STEP 1

Turn

to display the first selection list.

STEP 2

Press

STEP 3

Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.

to select the desired item.

To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press
.

514

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting songs
Turn

or press “” or “” on

to select the desired

song.
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press

Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
3

To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.

Interior features

Shuffle playback
■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press
.
To cancel, press

again.

■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press

again.

Repeat play
Press

To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display
Press

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name
515

3-4. Using the audio system

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Pressing

to enter iPod menu mode.
changes sound modes. (P. 552)

■ About iPod

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with

safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

516

3-4. Using the audio system

■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the

iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may

not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to
a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve the problem.

● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own con-

trols. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.

● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so,

charge the iPod before use.

● Supported models (P. 518)

■ iPod problems

■ Display

P. 497
■ Error messages

“ERROR”:

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”:

This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected
playlist.

“UPDATE”:

This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.
Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.

517

Interior features

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Compatible models

The following iPod, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices
can be used with this system.
● Made for

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

518

3-4. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ If the armrest cannot be fully closed

high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-

nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-

minal.

Interior features
519

3-4. Using the audio system

Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.

■ Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.

520

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Control panel
Type A
Playback/Pause button
Repeat play button

Folder selector buttons

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

File selector knob
Text button
Search playback button

Random playback button
File selector button

Playback button

521

3-4. Using the audio system

Type B
Playback/Pause button
Repeat play button

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

Folder selector buttons

File selector knob
Text button
Search playback button

Random playback button
File selector button

522

Playback button

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
or
to select the desired folder.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
STEP 2

When the desired folder is reached, press

again.
3

Selecting and scanning files

Turn

or press “” or “” on

to select the desired

file.
■ Scanning the files in a folder
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press

again.

When the desired file is reached, press

again.

Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press

523

Interior features

■ Selecting a file

3-4. Using the audio system

Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
.
To cancel, press

again.

■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press

again.

Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
.
To cancel, press

again.

■ Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press

again.

Switching the display
Press

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3 only) 
Track title  Artist name

524

3-4. Using the audio system

■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device

● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and

reconnected, format the memory.

■ Display

P. 497
■ Error messages

“ERROR”:

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.

525

Interior features

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.

3-4. Using the audio system

■ USB memory
● Compatible devices

USB memories that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.

526

3-4. Using the audio system

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility

Interior features

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags

527

3-4. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first
folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have
not been changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in
which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls.

528

3-4. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ If the armrest cannot be fully closed

may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it

is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory

or its terminal.

Interior features
529

3-4. Using the audio system

Bluetooth® audio system
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via
wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of
playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does
not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Title

Page

Using the Bluetooth® audio system

P. 535

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player

P. 540

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player

P. 544

Bluetooth® audio system setup

P. 551

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the portable player is switched off
● If the portable player is not connected
● If the portable player’s battery is low
● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the portable player

530

3-4. Using the audio system

■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 587)
■ About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Compatible models

● Bluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed:
Ver. 1.2)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.3)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions
may be limited depending on the type of portable player.

531

Interior features

● Following profiles:

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system

FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.

532

3-4. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING

533

Interior features

3-4. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

534

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.

Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition

Interior features

If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.

535

3-4. Using the audio system

Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without
the need to check the display or operate

■ Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

536

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure
below to register (pair) a portable player:
STEP 1

Press

and select “BT•A MENU” using

STEP 2

Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using

.
.

The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command
or
STEP 4

, and say the name to be

registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 5

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
STEP 6

Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.
537

Interior features

STEP 3

3-4. Using the audio system

Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® phone is heard.
STEP 7

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
(Bluetooth® phone P. 562)

Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
First menu

Second
menu

“BT•A
Setup”
“Setup”

“System
Setup”

538

Third menu

Operation detail

“Pair Audio”

Registering a portable player

“Connect”

Selecting a portable player to
be used

“Change Name”

Changing the registered name
of a portable player

“List Audios”

Listing the registered portable
players

“Set Passkey”

Changing the passkey

“Delete Audio”

Deleting a registered portable
player

“Guidance Vol”

Setting voice guidance volume

“Device Name”

Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name

“Initialize”

Initializing the system

3-4. Using the audio system

■ When using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving

● Operating the system using

Interior features

● Registering a portable player to the system
■ Changing the passkey

P. 549

539

3-4. Using the audio system

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Type A

Playback/Pause button
Album selector buttons

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

540

BT·A menu knob
Text button
Search playback button
Playback button
Repeat play button
Random playback button
Track selector button

3-4. Using the audio system

Type B
Playback/Pause button
Album selector buttons

Interior features

“PWRVOL” knob
Power Volume

BT·A menu knob
Text button
Search playback button
Playback button
Repeat play button
Random playback button
Track selector button

541

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press

Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on

to select the desired track.

Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
until you hear a beep.
Random playback
Press

To cancel, press

again.

Repeat play
Press

To cancel, press

again.

Scanning tracks
Press

To cancel, press

542

again.

3-4. Using the audio system

Switching the display
Press

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name
■ Bluetooth® audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
■ Display

P. 497
■ Error messages

“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.
Interior features
543

3-4. Using the audio system

Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows the
system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:

■ Functions and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or

● Registering a portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
● Selecting a portable player to be used
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
1. “Setup”  2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” 
3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

544

3-4. Using the audio system

Pattern B
STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using

STEP 3

Select one of the following functions using a voice command
or

to select “BT•A MENU”.
.

.
3

● Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”

Interior features

● Selecting a portable player to be used
“Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

545

3-4. Using the audio system

Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or

and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 537)
Selecting a portable player to be used
STEP 1

Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be used using
.

546

3-4. Using the audio system

Pattern A
STEP 3 Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

Pattern B
STEP 3

Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using

If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in either
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable
player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.

547

Interior features

STEP 1

3-4. Using the audio system

Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
.

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using

, and

say the new name.
STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or
. The list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read
aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”

548

3-4. Using the audio system

Changing the passkey

STEP 1

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

Pattern B
3
STEP 2

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using

STEP 3

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press

again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not
necessary.

549

Interior features

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

3-4. Using the audio system

Deleting a registered portable player
STEP 1

Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

Select the desired portable player to be deleted using

If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the
registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice
guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
STEP 3

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
(Bluetooth® phone P. 562)

■ The number of portable players that can be registered

Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.

550

3-4. Using the audio system

Bluetooth® audio system setup
■ System setup items and operation procedures
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or

(P. 584)
Pattern B
STEP 1

Press

to select “BT•A MENU”.
3

Select “System Setup” using

STEP 3

Select one of the following items using

Interior features

STEP 2

● Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol” (P. 586)
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
“Device Name” (P. 586)
● Initializing the system
“Initialize” (P. 587)

551

3-4. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode
Changes the following settings:
• Sound quality and volume
balance
P. 553
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to produce the best sound.

• Automatic Sound Levelizer
on/off
P. 553

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■ Changing sound quality modes
Press

Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order:
“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“ASL”

552

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning

adjusts the level.
Sound quality mode

Level

Turn counterclockwise

Turn clockwise

“BAS”

Bass*

-5 to 5

“MID”

Mid-range*

-5 to 5

Low

High

“TRE”

Treble*

-5 to 5

“FAD”

Front/rear
volume
balance

F7 to R7

Shifts to rear

Shifts to front

“BAL”

Left/right
volume
balance

L7 to R7

Shifts to left

Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off
Turning

clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning

counter-

clockwise turns off the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.

553

Interior features

Mode
displayed

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.

AUX port
STEP 3

Press

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.

554

3-4. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ If the armrest cannot be fully closed

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio

device or its terminal.

555

Interior features

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.

Turns the power on, selects
an audio source
Increases/decreases volume
Radio mode: Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a track, file
(MP3 and WMA) and disc
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and album
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode: Selects
a file and folder
Turning the power on
Press

when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear
a beep.

556

3-4. Using the audio system

Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If no discs are
inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.
Type A:
FM1FM2SAT1SAT2SAT3CD player
Bluetooth® audioAUXiPod or USB memory
AMFM1
Type B:
FM1FM2CD playerBluetooth® audioAUX
iPod or USB memoryAMFM1

Press “+” on

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-

ume.
Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station
STEP 1

Press

to select radio mode.

STEP 2

Press “” or “” on

to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” on the button
until you hear a beep.

557

Interior features

Adjusting the volume

3-4. Using the audio system

Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1

Press
to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB
memory mode.

STEP 2

Press “” or “” on

to select the desired track/file or song.

Selecting an album
to select Bluetooth® audio mode.

STEP 1

Press

STEP 2

Press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Selecting a folder
STEP 1

Press

to select USB memory mode.

STEP 2

Press and hold “” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Selecting a disc in the CD player
STEP 1

Press

to select CD mode.

STEP 2

Press and hold “” or “” on

■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station

Press

558

again.

until you hear a beep.

3-4. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

Interior features
559

3-4. Using the audio system

Hands-free system for mobile phones
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® mobile phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless
data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the
hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Title

560

Page

Using the hands-free system

P. 565

Making a phone call

P. 573

Setting a mobile phone

P. 578

Security and system setup

P. 584

Using the phone book

P. 588

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the mobile phone is switched off
● If you are outside service range
● If the mobile phone is not connected
● If the mobile phone's battery is low
● If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the phone
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• When a window is open
• When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• When the air conditioning is set to high
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (P. 587)
■ About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

561

Interior features

● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5)
and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth®
phone.
■ Certification for the hands-free system

562

3-4. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING

563

Interior features

3-4. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to mobile phones

Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.

564

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the hands-free system (for mobile phones)
■ Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.

Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection condition

Interior features

If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.

Reception level

565

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Steering wheel switches
Volume
During an incoming call:
Adjusts the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call:
Adjusts the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.

Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system
off/ends a call/refuses a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
■ Microphone

566

3-4. Using the audio system

Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without
the need to check the display or operate

567

Interior features

“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a
mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration
mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a mobile phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are
heard.
STEP 1

STEP 2

Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or

STEP 3

, and say the name to be

registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the mobile phone is heard.
STEP 5

Input the passkey into the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can
be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
568

3-4. Using the audio system

STEP 6

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or

(Bluetooth® audio player P. 531)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■ Normal operation
Second
menu

Third menu

Operation detail

“Callback”

Dialing a number stored in the
incoming call history memory

“Redial”

Dialing a number stored in the
outgoing call history memory

“Add Entry”

Adding a new phone number

“Change
Name”

Changing the registered name
in the phone book

“Delete
Entry”

Deleting the registered data

“Phonebook” “Del Spd
Dial”

Deleting speed dials

“List
Names”

Listing the registered data

“Speed
Dial”

Setting speed dials

569

Interior features

First menu

3-4. Using the audio system

First menu

Second
menu
“Security”

“Setup”

“Phone
Setup”

“System
Setup”

570

Third menu

Operation detail

“Set PIN”

Setting a PIN code

“Phbk Lock”

Locking the phone book

“Phbk Unlock”

Unlocking the phone book

“Pair Phone”

Registering the mobile phone
to be used

“Connect”

Selecting a mobile phone to be
used

“Change Name”

Changing the registered name
of a mobile phone

“List Phones”

Listing the registered mobile
phones

“Set Passkey”

Changing the passkey

“Delete Phone”

Deleting a registered mobile
phone

“Guidance Vol”

Setting voice guidance volume

“Device Name”

Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name

“Initialize”

Initializing the system

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Short cut key operation
First menu

Second menu

Operation detail

“Dial XXX (name)”

Dialing a name registered in the
phone book

“Phone book add
Entry”

Adding a new phone number

“Phone book Change
name”

Changing a registered name in
the phone book

“Phone book Delete
Entry”

Deleting the registered data

“Phone book List
names”

Listing the registered data

“Phone book Set
Speed Dial”

Setting speed dials

“Phone book Delete
Speed Dial”

Deleting speed dials

“Dial XXX (number)”

Dialing by inputting a number

“Phonebook Unlock”

Unlocking the phone book

“Phonebook Lock”

Locking the phone book

Interior features

“Phonebook”

571

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Automatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ When using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
 (star), and + (plus).
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system using
● Registering a mobile phone to the system
■ Changing the passkey

P. 581

572

3-4. Using the audio system

Making a phone call
■ Making a phone call
● Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
● Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”

Interior features

■ Receiving a phone call
● Answering a phone call
● Refusing a phone call
■ Transferring a phone call
■ Call waiting
■ Using the call history memory
● Dialing
● Storing number in the phone book
● Deleting

573

3-4. Using the audio system

Dialing by inputting a number
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using

Dialing by inputting a name
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch
when the desired name is read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using

Speed dialing
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3

574

Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
Press the off-hook switch.

3-4. Using the audio system

When receiving a phone call
■ Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the mobile phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.
*1:

This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the mobile phone to the system during a call.

*2:

While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from
the system to the mobile phone.

Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available:
● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the offhook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between
calls.)
● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.

575

Interior features

Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the operation
of the phone.

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when
using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number using

The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice com-

STEP 3

mand or

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then
“Confirm” using a voice command or

Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command
or

576

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Call waiting
● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your mobile phone and service

provider.

■ Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history
memories.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will

increase.

Interior features
577

3-4. Using the audio system

Setting a mobile phone
Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered mobile
phones:

■ Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or

● Registering a mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Pair Phone”
● Selecting a mobile phone to be used
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Connect Phone (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered mobile phones
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “List Phones”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered mobile phone
1. “Setup”  2. “Phone Setup”  3. “Delete Phone”

578

3-4. Using the audio system

Registering a mobile phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or

, and perform the

procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 568)
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
STEP 1

Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or
.

:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2

Select the mobile phone to be used using

579

Interior features

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

3-4. Using the audio system

Changing the registered name of a mobile phone

STEP 1

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name of the mobile phone to be changed by either of
the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired mobile
phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of
the desired mobile phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2 Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using
.

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
say the new name.

STEP 4

580

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

, and

3-4. Using the audio system

Listing the registered mobile phones
Select “List Phones” using a voice command or

. The list of regis-

tered mobile phones will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a mobile phone is being read
aloud selects the mobile phone, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a mobile phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)”
3

● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

Interior features

● Deleting a mobile phone: “Delete Phone”
Changing the passkey

STEP 1

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

581

3-4. Using the audio system

Pattern B
STEP 2

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press

again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not
necessary.

Deleting a registered mobile phone

STEP 1

Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the mobile phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

582

3-4. Using the audio system

Pattern B
STEP 2

Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using

If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player,
the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A
voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
STEP 3

Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or

(Bluetooth® audio player P. 531)
3
■ The number of mobile phones that can be registered

Interior features

Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.

583

3-4. Using the audio system

Security and system setup
■ Security setting items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or

● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Set PIN”
● Locking the phone book
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)”
● Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup”  2. “Security”  3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk
Unlock)”
■ System setup items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using
:
● Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Guidance Vol”
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Device Name”
● Initializing the system
1. “Setup”  2. “System Setup”  3. “Initialize”

584

3-4. Using the audio system

Setting or changing the PIN
■ Setting a PIN
STEP 1

Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Enter a PIN using a voice command or

When using

.
.

, input the code 1 digit at a time.
3

■ Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or

STEP 3

Enter a new PIN using a voice command or

When using

Interior features

STEP 1

.
.

, input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book
STEP 1

Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock
(Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or

585

3-4. Using the audio system

STEP 2

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using

Setting voice guidance volume

STEP 1

Select “Guidance Vol” using

STEP 2

Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn

To increase the volume: Turn

counterclockwise.

clockwise.

Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name

STEP 1

Select “Device Name” using

STEP 2

Turn

STEP 3

Select “Go Back” using

586

to display the Bluetooth® device address and name.
to return to “System Setup”.

3-4. Using the audio system

Initializing the system

STEP 1

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using

STEP 2

Select “Confirm” again using

■ Initialization
● The following data in the system can be initialized:

■ When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:
● Dialing by inputting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book

587

Interior features

• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered mobile phone data
• Security code
• Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data
• Passkey for the mobile phones
• Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players
• Guidance volume
• Receiver volume
• Ring tone volume
● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its
original state.

3-4. Using the audio system

Using the phone book
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or

● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Add Entry”
● Changing the registered name in the phone book
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook”  2. “List Names”
● Setting speed dials
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
● Deleting the registered data
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Entry”
● Deleting speed dials
1. “Phonebook”  2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
● Inputting a phone number using a voice command
● Transferring data from the mobile phone
● Inputting a phone number using
● Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history

588

3-4. Using the audio system

■ Adding procedure
STEP 1

Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command:
STEP 2

STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or

STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the mobile phone:
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
.

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for
details on transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using

589

Interior features

command or

3-4. Using the audio system

Inputting a phone number using

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using

.
, and press

again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history:
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command or

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
.

590

3-4. Using the audio system

STEP 3

Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using

STEP 4

and say the desired name.

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

In STEP 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.

STEP 1

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or

Interior features

Changing the registered name in the phone book
.

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2

Select the desired name to be changed using

591

3-4. Using the audio system

STEP 3

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using

and

say the new name.
STEP 4

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or

Listing the registered data
Select “List Names” using a voice command or

. The list of the reg-

istered data will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects
the data, and the following function will become available:
● Dialing: “Dial”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
● Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

592

3-4. Using the audio system

Setting speed dials
STEP 1

Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or
.

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the
following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command
or

STEP 2
STEP 3

Select the desired data using

Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed
dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a
voice command or

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

593

Interior features

a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired
name is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B

3-4. Using the audio system

Deleting the registered data

STEP 1

Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or

Pattern A
STEP 2 Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone
number.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of
the desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch.
Pattern B
STEP 2

Select the desired data to be deleted using

Deleting speed dials
STEP 1

Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or

STEP 2

Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

■ Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

594

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

595

Interior features

Front personal lights (P. 596)
Front interior light (P. 596)
Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
Rear personal lights ( P. 596)
Rear interior light
Door courtesy lights
Scuff lights (if equipped)
Footwell lights
Outer foot lights

3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights

Interior lights
Turns the lights on/off linked to
door positions.
Turns the lights on/off

Personal lights
Front
Turns the light on/off

Rear
Turns the light on/off

596

3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked,
and whether the doors are open/closed.
■ To prevent battery discharge

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
● Personal lights
● Interior lights
● Door courtesy lights
● Scuff lights (if equipped)

● Footwell lights

Interior features

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before the lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 834)

597

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Glove box
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
Bottle holders/door pockets
Cup holders
Console box/coin holder
Under tray
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with

other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored

items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.

598

3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box

Glove box
The glove box can be opened by pressing the lock release button and
locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
Opens
Locks
Unlocks

Interior features

■ Power back door main switch

The power back door main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 58)

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an
accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the
items stored inside.

599

3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders/door pockets

Bottle holders/door pockets
Front
The front door pockets can be
opened and closed.

Rear

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving (front door pockets)

Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holders

Do not place anything other than bottles in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury.

600

3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders/door pockets and cup holders

NOTICE
■ When stowing a bottle

Put the cap on before stowing the bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle
holders. The contents may spill.

Cup holders
Front (Center console)
Press down the lid on the farthest
side from the driver.
3

Interior features

Front (Instrument panel)
Press in and release the cup
holder.

601

3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders

Rear
STEP 1

Pull down the armrest.

STEP 2

Press down the button on the armrest.

■ Cup holder insert

The cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.

602

3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders

CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Even
when the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ To prevent burns

Put a lid on containers with hot liquids inside.
■ When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Interior features
603

3-6. Using the storage features
Console box

Console box
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

■ Tray in the console box

The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.

604

3-6. Using the storage features
Console box
■ Console box storage space

The console box comes with partition doors.

Partition door B

Partition door A can be removed.

Partition
door A

The storage space can be expanded by
opening the partition doors.
Lift the tab
Pull partition door B as shown in the illustration

Interior features

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

NOTICE
■ Tray

Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening
and closing of the lid.

605

3-6. Using the storage features
Coin holder and auxiliary boxes

Coin holder
Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and slide the armrest.

Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
Overhead
Press in the lid.
This box is useful for temporarily
storing sunglasses and similar small
items.

606

3-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes

Rear seat
STEP 1

Pull down the armrest.

STEP 2

Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the armrest.
3

Interior features

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items stored in the auxiliary box may fall out and cause death or serious injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop.

607

3-6. Using the storage features
Under tray

Under tray

CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the under tray

Observe the following precautions when putting items in the under tray. Failure to
do so may cause items to be thrown out of the tray in the event of sudden braking or
steering. In these cases, the items may interfere with pedal operation or cause
driver distraction, resulting in an accident.
● Do not store items in the tray that can easily shift or roll out.
● Do not stack items in the tray higher than the tray's edge.
● Do not put items in the tray that may protrude over the tray's edge.

608

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it backward.
3

Interior features
609

3-7. Other interior features

Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.

■ To prevent battery discharge

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

NOTICE
■ When not in use

Keep the vanity mirror closed.

610

3-7. Other interior features

Clock
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

With a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
With the Lexus Display Audio system
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes

Interior features

Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes

611

3-7. Other interior features

■ The clock is displayed when

The clock is displayed when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the battery is disconnected

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

612

3-7. Other interior features

Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40°F
(-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

With a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
With the Lexus Display Audio system
The outside temperature is displayed on the air conditioning
operation screen. (P. 345)

Interior features

Without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system

613

3-7. Other interior features

■ If the temperature does not appear (without the Lexus Display Audio system)

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ When “- -” or “E” is displayed (with the Lexus Display Audio system)

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change:
● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25

km/h])

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a

garage, tunnel, etc.)

614

3-7. Other interior features

Multi-display light control
The brightness of the multi-display can be adjusted to four levels.

Press and release the “DISP”
switch until the brightness of the
display is adjusted to the desired
level.

3
■ Instrument panel linked brightness control

: If equipped
615

Interior features

When the headlight switch is turned on, the brightness of the multi-display will be
reduced in accordance with the brightness of the instrument panel. (P. 192)

3-7. Other interior features

Power outlets
The power outlets can be used for the following components.

12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
Inside the console (12 V)
STEP 1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock, and lift the armrest.

STEP 2

Open the cover.

Under tray (12V)
Open the cover.

616

3-7. Other interior features

Luggage compartment (12V)
Open the cover.

On the back surface of the console (120 VAC)*
Open the cover.

Interior features

*: If equipped

■ The power outlets can be used when

12 V
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
120 VAC
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

617

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlets

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
12 V: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 VAC: Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC)

The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

618

3-7. Other interior features

Heated steering wheel
The heated steering wheel heats the leather portions on the left and right
of the steering wheel.

Turns the heater on/off
The indicator light comes on
when the heater is operating.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ To prevent battery discharge
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■ If the indicator light does not come on
If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is pressed, a malfunction
may have occurred in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION
■ Burns

Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes
in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)

: If equipped
619

Interior features

■ The heated steering wheel can be used when

3-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters and ventilators
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.

Turns the seat heater on
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number is, the
warmer the seat becomes.

Blows air from the seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number is, the
stronger the airflow becomes.

■ Operating condition

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use

Set the knob at “0”. The indicator light turns off.

: If equipped
620

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on

to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•

Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.

■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

621

Interior features

NOTICE

3-7. Other interior features

Armrest
Pull the armrest down for use.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

622

3-7. Other interior features

Coat hooks
To use the coat hook, push it in.

CAUTION
3

■ Items that must not be hung on the hook

623

Interior features

Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.

3-7. Other interior features

Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.

CAUTION
■ Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

624

3-7. Other interior features

Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.

STEP 1

STEP 2

*: Always align the  marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.

625

Interior features

Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,

even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in

the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.

● With the engine stopped and the shift lever

in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the
floor mat.

626

3-7. Other interior features

Luggage compartment features
■ Cargo hooks
Pull the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided
for securing loose items.

■ Auxiliary boxes
Deck side boxes

627

Interior features

Pull the strap upwards when lifting the cover up.

3-7. Other interior features

Deck floor box
Pull the lever upwards when lifting the deck board up.

628

3-7. Other interior features

■ Luggage cover (if equipped)
STEP 1

Push from above until the claws
on both sides are securely
locked in position.

Pull out the luggage cover and
hook it onto the anchors.

Removing the luggage covers
Front luggage cover
Press the buttons to remove the
luggage cover.

629

Interior features

STEP 2

3-7. Other interior features

Rear luggage cover
STEP 1

Detach the outer clips of the rear
luggage cover from the back door.

STEP 2

Detach the inner clips of the rear
luggage cover from the back door.

■ Installing the rear luggage cover
● Ensure that the luggage cover is in the proper installation position.

Push the clips of the rear luggage cover into the indentions on the back door
until they are locked into place.

● Check that the rear luggage cover is securely attached.

630

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.

Interior features
631

3-7. Other interior features

Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and
other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.

Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons

■ Programming the HomeLink
STEP 1

Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink
control buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.

632

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 2

Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button”
instructions. (P. 635)

Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

STEP 4

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.

633

Interior features

STEP 3

3-7. Other interior features

■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1

Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the learn button.

STEP 2

Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.

STEP 3

Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4

Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.

STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4

634

Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.

3-7. Other interior features

Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5

■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.

Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should turn on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.

635

Interior features

Operating HomeLink

3-7. Other interior features

Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.

■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from

the HomeLink button.

■ When programming

Depending on radio wave conditions, the direction the remote control transmitter is
pointed and the remaining charge of the transmitter's batteries, there are cases
when programming may be difficult.

636

3-7. Other interior features

■ Certification for the garage door opener

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLGHSHL4
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4
FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

637

Interior features

NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

3-7. Other interior features

Compass

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.

■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press
for more than 3
seconds.
The location the compass is displayed differs according to the
type of inner rear view mirror.

■ Displays and directions
Display

Direction

“N”

North

“NE”

Northeast

“E”

East

“SE”

Southeast

“S”

South

“SW”

Southwest

“W”

West

“NW”

Northwest

: If equipped
638

3-7. Other interior features

Calibrating the compass

If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.

■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2

Press and hold
.
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
The location the compass is displayed differs according to the type
of inner rear view mirror.

639

Interior features

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending on the
geographic position of the vehicle.

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 3

Referring to the map above, press
the zone you are in.

to select the number of

If the direction is displayed for several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.

■ Circling calibration
If “C” appears on the display, drive
the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less in a circle until a direction is
displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-

ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized. (There is a magnet or metal object near

the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.

640

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's

magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,

etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

641

Interior features

■ To ensure normal operation of the compass

3-7. Other interior features

Safety Connect

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.

■ System components
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button

: If equipped
642

3-7. Other interior features

■ Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 645)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 646)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 646)

■ Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.

643

Interior features

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 646)

3-7. Other interior features

■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-

ing Safety Connect.

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Con-

tact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle

Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in
Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States
(except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunica-

tions Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

■ Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

644

3-7. Other interior features

Safety Connect LED light Indicators
● When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns
off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the
service is active.
● The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
• Green indicator light on = Active service
• Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
• Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
• No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the
occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats
the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.

645

Interior features

Safety Connect services

3-7. Other interior features

■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.

646

3-7. Other interior features

Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
3

● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.

647

Interior features

● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

3-7. Other interior features

■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B
FCC ID: N7NGTM2
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

648

Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............. 650
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.............. 653

4
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 664
Hood........................................... 667
Positioning a floor jack ......... 668

4-2. Maintenance

Engine compartment ............ 670

Maintenance
requirements ........................ 656

Tires............................................ 684

General maintenance .......... 659

Wheels....................................... 697

Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................ 663

Air conditioning filter ........... 699

Tire inflation pressure........... 693

Electronic key battery........... 701
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 703
Headlight aim ........................... 716
Light bulbs................................. 719

649

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors.
• Turn off the power back door system.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
● In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine

operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in
damage to the rear spoiler.

■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the

windows.

● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed

properly.

650

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard

brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving

for long distance in the hot weather.

● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION
■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off.
OFF

● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is

touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the

raindrop sensor

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

651

Maintenance and care

If the wiper switch is in
, the wipers
may operate unexpectedly in the following
situations, and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries and cause
damage to the wiper blades.

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-

minum wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

•
•
•
•
•

After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with

low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper
arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to
their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in
be damaged.

652

, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

653

Maintenance and care

■ Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P. 121)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

654

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-

rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach
• Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park

the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as

they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of vehicle. Water may also
cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to

the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

655

Maintenance and care

■ Water on the floor

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance:

■ General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled
Maintenance”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
or “Warranty Booklet”.

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

656

4-2. Maintenance

■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Display the trip meter “A” (P. 192), then turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off.
STEP 2 While pressing the “ODO/TRIP” button, turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 3

Keep the “ODO/TRIP” button pressed for
about 5 seconds. The resetting procedure is
complete when “000000” in the trip meter
flashes once and the message in the multiinformation display disappears.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been

performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

657

Maintenance and care

latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.

4-2. Maintenance

CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
serious injury or death.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-

ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-

nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 681)

658

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.

Engine compartment
Items

Check points

Battery

Check the connections.
(P. 681)

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
(P. 679)

Engine coolant

Is the coolant at the correct level?
(P. 677)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(P. 674)

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.

Radiator/condenser/hoses

The radiator and condenser should
be free from foreign objects.
(P. 678)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 683)

Maintenance and care
659

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior
Items

660

Check points

Accelerator pedal

• The accelerator pedal should move
smoothly (without uneven pedal
effort or catching).

Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the
shift lever is in P, is the vehicle
securely stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
(P. 814)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?
(P. 814)

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too
close to the floor when the brakes
are applied.

Head restraints

• Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?

4-2. Maintenance

Items

Check points
• Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed correctly? (P. 716)

Parking brake

• Does the parking brake pedal
move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.

Maintenance and care

Indicators/buzzers

661

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points

Doors

• Do the doors operate smoothly?

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system
work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or
excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

Windshield wipers/rear window
wiper

• The wiper blades should not show
any signs of cracking, splitting,
wear, contamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the
windshield/rear window without
streaking or skipping.

CAUTION
■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.

662

4-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

663

Maintenance and care

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections.
Items

Battery condition

Brake fluid level

Engine coolant level

664

Parts and tools

(P. 681)

• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)

(P. 679)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)

(P. 677)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items

Parts and tools

Engine oil level

(P. 674)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)

Fuses

(P. 703)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original

Tire inflation pressure

(P. 693)

• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source

Headlight aim

(P. 716)

• Phillips-head screwdriver

Radiator and condenser (P. 678)

Washer fluid

(P. 683)


• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water
or washer fluid)

Maintenance and care
665

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-

ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine

compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel

and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and

corrosive sulfuric acid.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 678)
■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in your eyes.

NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air.

666

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1

Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.

STEP 2

Pull up the hood catch and lift
the hood.

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

667

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

■ Front

■ Rear

668

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or
serious injury:
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as

the one shown in the illustration.

● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the

jack.

● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported

only by the floor jack.

● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the

shift lever to P.

● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the

floor jack.

669

Maintenance and care

● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment

Engine oil filler cap
(P. 675)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 674)
Battery
(P. 681)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 679)
Fuse box
(P. 703)

670

Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 677)
Condenser
(P. 678)
Radiator
(P. 678)
Electric cooling fans
Washer fluid tank (P. 683)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment covers
Outside

Front

Maintenance and care
671

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Installing the clips

NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compartment cover

Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.

672

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Battery cover
Removing the battery cover.

NOTICE
■ When installing the battery cover

Securely install the cover over the battery. Failure to do so may cause water to enter
the engine compartment when it rains or the vehicle is washed, resulting in a malfunction.

Maintenance and care
673

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.

STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5

STEP 6

674

Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as that already in the
engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil
selection
Oil quantity
(Low Full)
Items

STEP 2
STEP 3

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or

after replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when

driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently

through heavy traffic

675

Maintenance and care

STEP 1

P. 809

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin

disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-

pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

676

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 799)

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

677

Maintenance and care

■ Coolant selection

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling systems.

CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

678

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.

■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
Clean funnel

Maintenance and care
679

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, may be a serious problem.

680

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp

■ Before recharging

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the

ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-

necting the charger cables to the battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery

In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the
system.
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P, and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors.
STEP 3 Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the proce-

dure.)
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method, contact
your Lexus dealer.

681

Maintenance and care

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury,
take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

682

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.

CAUTION
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

683

Maintenance and care

■ When adding washer fluid

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.

■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.

Front

To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.

Front

684

To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 747)
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 687)
4

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing
travelling speed or load weight
● When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

685

Maintenance and care

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When rotating the tires

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 815)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

686

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.

Wait for a few minutes in “ENGINE START STOP” switch to on,
and then turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique
ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it
is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the

fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage.

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or

location of a cut or other damage.

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.

687

Maintenance and care

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a
system malfunction.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either
the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 821)

■ Tire types

1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 302)

688

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.

● If you have accidentally turned the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off during

initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization
will restart automatically when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been
turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.

● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary,

adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold,
and conduct initialization again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn-

ing light does not blink 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light

Maintenance and care

blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.

689

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Certification for tire pressure warning system

TPMS Transmitter FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt
à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est
susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
TPMS Receiver

FCC ID: HYQ13BCX

NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

690

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Tire pressure warning system operation

The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire
bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix

tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

● Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

691

Maintenance and care

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters

and tire valve caps

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and

transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-

fied. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 685)
■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

692

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 815)

Maintenance and care
693

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge graduations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level,
adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.

694

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure
that is even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

695

Maintenance and care

pressure to be higher after driving.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as
possible.

696

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced,
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 685)
697

Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.

698

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Open the glove box. Lift and
STEP 2
remove the partition.

STEP 3

Remove the glove box cover.
4

Maintenance and care
699

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 4

STEP 5

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” mark shown on the
filter should be pointing up.

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner's
Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system

When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.

700

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

STEP 3

Remove the depleted battery.

Maintenance and care

STEP 2

Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.

701

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance

shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufac-

turer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will

not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)

The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.

CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep
away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

702

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
STEP 2 After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
for details about which fuse to check. (P. 706)
STEP 3 Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 671)
STEP 4 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
STEP 1

Maintenance and care

Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.

703

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 5

Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A

STEP 6

Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.

Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.

704

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.

Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.

Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amperage
rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.

705

Maintenance and care

Type E

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

RDI FAN NO. 1

80 A

Electric cooling fans

RR DEF

50 A

Rear window defogger

AIR SUS

50 A

HEATER

50 A

SPARE

30 A

SPARE

40 A

ABS NO. 2

30 A

Vehicle stability control

H-LP CLN

30 A

Headlight cleaner

PBD

30 A

Power back door

30 A

Starter system

50 A

A/F, H-LP RH HI, H-LP LH LO, H-LP
RH LO, H-LP LH HI, HORN, SHORN

ABS NO. 1

50 A

Vehicle stability control

706

Air conditioning system

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse
13

ALT

AMP1

Circuit

60 A

Electric power steering system

140 A

IG1 MAIN, TOWING BATT,
DEICER, TOWING, STOP, RDI FAN
NO. 1, FILTER, RR DEF, AIR SUS,
HEATER, ABS NO. 2, H-LP CLN,
PBD, ECU-IG1 NO. 1, ECU-IG1 NO.
3, GAUGE NO. 1, ECU-IG1 NO. 2,
EPS, FR WIP, RR WIP, FR WASH, RR
WASH, RH S-HTR, LH S-HTR, TAIL,
PANEL, D/L ALT B, FR FOG, FR
DOOR, FL DOOR, RR DOOR, RL
DOOR, PSB, P-SEAT LH, P-SEAT
RH, TI&TE, FUEL OPN, DR LOCK,
OBD, RR FOG, S/ROOF, 4WD,
INVERTER, ECU-ACC, P/POINT,
CIG, RADIO NO. 2

30 A

Audio system

EFI MAIN

30 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic controlled transmission, EFI NO. 1, EFI NO. 2, F/PMP

AMP2

30 A

Audio system

IG2 MAIN

30 A

IGN, GAUGE NO. 2, ECU IG 2

IP J/B

25 A

Power door lock system

STR LOCK

20 A

Starter system

RAD NO. 3

15 A

Meters and gauges, navigation system, audio system

HAZ

15 A

Emergency flashers

707

Maintenance and care

EPS

Ampere

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

ETCS

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system

RAD NO. 1

10 A

Audio system, navigation system

AM2

7.5 A

Starter system

ECU-B NO. 2

7.5 A

Air conditioning system, front passenger occupant classification system,
audio system, vehicle stability control
system, power windows

MAYDAY/TEL

7.5 A

MAYDAY/TEL

IMMOBI

7.5 A

IMMOBI

ALT-S

7.5 A

Charging system

DRL

7.5 A

Daytime running light system

IGN

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system

10 A

Vanity mirror lights, luggage compartment lights, interior lights, personal
lights, door courtesy lights, footwell
lights, scuff lights

10 A

Tilt and telescopic steering, multiplex
communication system, meters and
gauges, driving position memory,
power seats, power back door, headup display, starter system, outside rear
view mirror, steering sensor, garage
door opener

708

DOME

ECU-B NO. 1

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

EFI NO. 1

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic controlled transmission

WIP-S

7.5 A

Cruise control

ECU-IG1 NO. 4

10 A

Air conditioning system, rear window
defogger, vehicle stability control system, electric cooling fans

BK/UP LP

7.5 A

Back-up lights

ECU-IG1 NO. 5

15 A

Air conditioning system

10 A

Head light cleaner, cruise control,
vehicle stability control, air conditioning system, Blind Spot Monitor

ECU-IG1 NO. 6

EFI NO. 2

10 A

F/PMP

15 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system

DEICER

25 A

Windshield wipers and washer

STOP

7.5 A

Vehicle stability control, vehicle
dynamics integrated management,
stop lights, electronic controlled
transmission, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, shift lock control system,
starter system

TOWING BATT

20 A

Trailer battery

TOWING

30 A

Trailer lights
709

Maintenance and care

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

710

Ampere

Circuit

FILTER

10 A

IG1 MAIN

30 A

ECU-IG1 NO. 6, BK/UP LP, ECUIG1 NO. 5, ECU-IG1 NO. 4

H-LP RH HI

15 A

Right-hand headlight (high beam)

H-LP LH HI

15 A

Left-hand headlight (high beam)

BIXENON

10 A

H-LP RH LO

15 A

Right-hand headlight (low beam)

H-LP LH LO

15 A

Left-hand headlight (low beam)

HORN

10 A

Horn

A/F

20 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system

S-HORN

7.5 A

S-HORN

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Driver’s side instrument panel

Fuse
1

P/POINT

Ampere

Circuit

15 A

Power outlet

ECU-ACC

10 A

CIG

15 A

Power outlet

RADIO NO. 2

7.5 A

Audio system, navigation system

GAUGE NO. 1

10 A

Emergency flashers, navigation system, head-up display, air conditioning
system, charging system

10 A

Outside rear view mirror, windshield
wipers and washer, seat heaters,
starter system, power outlet, moon
roof, air conditioning system

ECU-IG1 NO. 3

Maintenance and care

Navigation system, air conditioning
system, audio system, multiplex communication system, multi-information
display, head-up display

711

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

712

Ampere

Circuit

ECU-IG1 NO. 1

10 A

Multiplex communication system,
steering sensor, shift lock control system, tilt and telescopic steering, automatic transmission system, power
back door, pre-collision system, vehicle stability control system, tire pressure warning system

S/ROOF

30 A

Moon roof

FUEL OPN

7.5 A

Fuel filler door opener

PSB

30 A

Pre-collision seat belt

TI & TE

30 A

Tilt and telescopic steering system

DR LOCK

10 A

FR FOG

7.5 A

Front fog lights

P-SEAT LH

30 A

Power seat (left-side)

4WD

7.5 A

AWD system

INVERTER

20 A

Power outlet

RR FOG

7.5 A

D/L ALT B

25 A

Multiplex communication system,
power door lock system, power back
door

EPS

10 A

Electric power steering system

ECU-IG1 NO. 2

10 A

Intuitive parking assist, AWD system,
pre-collision seat belt

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

PANEL

10 A

TAIL

10 A

Parking lights, front side marker lights,
tail lights, license plate lights, front fog
lights, towing converter

AIR SUS

20 A

P-SEAT RH

30 A

Power seat (right-side)

OBD

7.5 A

On-Board diagnosis

FR DOOR

25 A

Front power window (right-side), outside rear view mirror

RR DOOR

25 A

Rear power window (right-side)

FL DOOR

25 A

Front power window (left-side), outside rear view mirror

RL DOOR

25 A

Rear power window (left-side)

FR WASH

25 A

Windshield wipers and washer

RR WIP

15 A

Windshield wipers and washer

RR WASH

20 A

Windshield wipers and washer

FR WIP

30 A

Windshield wipers and washer

10 A

Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, front passenger occupant classification system, SRS airbag system,
stop lights, electronic controlled
transmission, steering lock system

ECU IG2

Maintenance and care

Switch illumination, navigation system,
automatic transmission system, audio
system, multi-information display, air
conditioning system, multiplex communication system

713

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

714

Ampere

Circuit

GAUGE NO. 2

7.5 A

Gauge and meters

RH S-HTR

15 A

Seat heater (right-side)

LH S-HTR

15 A

Seat heater (left-side)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may

need replacement. (P. 719)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other

object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

● Do not modify fuse or fuse boxes.

NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.

715

Maintenance and care

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Headlight aim
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 671
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B

Vehicles with discharge headlights
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B

■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.

716

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adjusting the headlight aim
Vehicles with halogen headlights
STEP 1

Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.

STEP 2

Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as in step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the headlight cannot be
adjusted using this procedure,
take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer to adjust the headlight
aim.

Maintenance and care
717

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Vehicles with discharge headlights
STEP 1

Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.

STEP 2

Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the headlight cannot be
adjusted using this procedure,
take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer to adjust the headlight
aim.

718

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.

■ Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 817)
■ Removing the engine compartment covers
P. 671
■ Turning off the power back door main switch
P. 58
■ Front bulb locations
Vehicles with halogen headlights
4
Headlight low beam

Headlight high beam

Maintenance and care

Front turn signal light

719

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Vehicles with discharge headlights
Headlight high beam

Front turn signal light

720

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear bulb locations
Tail light

Tail light

Back-up light
Rear side marker light

Rear turn signal light

Maintenance and care
721

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight high beams
STEP 1

Right side:
Open the cap.
Move the washer fluid filler
opening to allow easy access to
the light bulbs.

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

STEP 3

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

722

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 4

Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.

STEP 5

Turn and secure the bulb base.
Connect the connector.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight high beams on once and
visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

6
STEP 5

4
STEP 51

Maintenance and care

When replacing the right side bulb, install by conducting
with the directions reversed.

723

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Halogen headlight low beams (if equipped)
Turn the bulb base counterclockSTEP 1
wise.

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.

STEP 3

Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.

STEP 4

Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlight low beams on once and
visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

724

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal light
STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Remove the light bulb.

Maintenance and care
725

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear turn signal and tail lights
STEP 1

Remove the access hole cover.
Use a flathead
wrapped in a cloth.

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Tail light
Rear turn signal light

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.
Tail light
Rear turn signal light

726

screwdriver

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tail and back-up lights
STEP 1

Remove the access hole cover.
Use a flathead
wrapped in a cloth.

STEP 2

screwdriver

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Tail light
Back-up light
4

Remove the light bulb.

Maintenance and care

STEP 3

Tail light
Back-up light

727

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear side marker light (right side)
STEP 1

Remove the bolts using a Phillipshead screwdriver and remove the
clip.

Removing the clip
Installing the clip

STEP 2

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.

728

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear side marker light (left side)
STEP 1

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

STEP 2

Remove the light bulb.

● Discharge headlight low beams (if equipped)
● Daytime running lights
● Parking lights
● Front side marker lights
● Front fog lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Stop lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
729

Maintenance and care

■ Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■ LED bulbs

The daytime running lights, parking lights, front side marker lights, LED front fog
lights (if equipped), side turn signal lights, stop lights, high mounted stoplight and
licence plate lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take
your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following
situations:
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.

730

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning

off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is

unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid
getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may

result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

Metal components

● Vehicles with discharge headlights:

731

Maintenance and care

While the low beam headlights are turned
on, and for a short time after they have
been turned off, metal components at the
rear of the headlight assembly will be
extremely hot. To prevent burns, do not
touch these metal components until you
are certain they have cooled down.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light

bulbs).

● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights

are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.

● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs,

connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

732

When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers............... 734
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ...................................... 735
If you think something is
wrong ....................................... 742
Fuel pump shut off system.... 743

5
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .................................. 744
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 754
If you have a flat tire................ 774
If the engine will not start .... 789
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ......................... 791
If you lose your keys .............. 792
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 793
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................. 796
If your vehicle overheats ..... 799
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 802
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency............................ 804

733

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle
has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch
once again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating,
the battery may discharge.

734

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
2WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the
front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions.
(P. 736, 740)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.
AWD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly. (P. 736, 740)

Situations needs to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.

735

When trouble arises

Towing with a sling-type truck

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front (2WD models)
Release the parking brake.

From the front (AWD models)
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.

From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.

736

5-1. Essential information

Using a flatbed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.

When trouble arises
737

5-1. Essential information

Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for 50
miles (80 km) at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Emergency towing procedure
Take out the towing eyelet. (P. 774)
Type A

STEP 1

STEP 2

Insert the mechanical key (P. 31)
into the groove and release the
claws. With the mechanical key
inserted, remove the eyelet cover
by pulling it towards you.

Type B
STEP 2

738

Insert the mechanical key (P. 31)
into the groove and release the
claws. With the mechanical key
inserted, remove the eyelet cover
by pulling it towards you.

5-1. Essential information

Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten as much as possible by hand.

STEP 3

Using the tip of the wheel nut
wrench, tighten down the towing
eyelet securely without interfering
with the bumper.

STEP 4

STEP 5

Securely attach a cable or chain to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

STEP 6

If the engine does not start, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to
IGNITION ON mode.

Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: P. 791

When trouble arises

STEP 7

Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.

■ While towing

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■ Wheel nut wrench

Wheel nut wrench is installed in the luggage compartment. (P. 774)

739

5-1. Essential information

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle

2WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front
wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off
the ground.
If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels
contacting the ground, the drivetrain and
related parts may be damaged.
AWD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground,
the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck.

740

5-1. Essential information

CAUTION
■ While towing
● When towing using a rope, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress

on the towing hook and rope.
The towing hook or rope may become damaged, broken debris may hit people
and cause serious damage.

● Do not turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.

There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and can not be operated.

■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could
be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)

741

When trouble arises

Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent
causing serious damage to the Active Torque
Control 4WD system (AWD models) and
transmission. (P. 323)

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal.
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking.
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road.
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor

742

5-1. Essential information

Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of
fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
STEP 1
STEP 2

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode
or turn it off.
Restart the engine.

NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

When trouble arises
743

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on
or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
(U.S.A.)
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
(Canada)
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
P. 759

Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light

Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

744

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light

Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
(U.S.A.)
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
(Canada)
• The brake assist system
(U.S.A.)

745

When trouble arises

Electric power steering system warning light (warning
buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(Flashes)

Warning light/Details
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 278)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision braking is disabled. (P. 279)
• The light will turn on when the system cannot temporarily
be used. (P. 759)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• The TRAC system; or
• The hill-start assist control system

746

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light goes off.
Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Check that all the doors are
Indicates that one or more of closed.
the doors is not fully closed.

(On the instrument panel)

Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Fasten the seat belt.
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.

When trouble arises

(On the center
panel)

Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 2.8 gal. (10.7
L, 2.3 Imp. gal.) or less

P. 754

747

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (P. 750)
• Flat tire (P. 774)

Adjust the tire inflation pressure (including the full-size
spare tire) to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the light
does not turn off even if the
tire inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.

When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system
(P. 751)

*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not
fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
(P. 759)

*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver
and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds
intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20
km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

748

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The lamp will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield and rear side airbag sensors,
door sensors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front
passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (P. 119)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and warning

buzzer

● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection

sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound
even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
warning light may not operate properly.

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops,
the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning
buzzer may sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

749

When trouble arises

● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

Vehicles with a compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though
the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light
will go off after a few minutes.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust to the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-

tered in the tire pressure warning computer

● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or

wheel housings

750

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire

pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used
● Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor

radio wave signal reception

● Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: If a large metallic object which can interfere

with signal reception is put in the luggage compartment

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization

The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 834)

CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-

ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change
it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could

lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

751

When trouble arises

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.

752

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

When trouble arises
753

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.

Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following actions
have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning message

(U.S.A.)
(Canada)

754

Details

Indicates the following:
• The brake fluid level is low; or,
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
A buzzer also sounds.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message

(U.S.A.)

Details

Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil pressure is too low.

(Canada)

When trouble arises

Indicates the AWD system has overheated
(Flashes)
(AWD models)

755

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system

(AWD models)

Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system

Indicates a malfunction in the brake lights system

756

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.
(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight
leveling system
(If equipped)

757

When trouble arises

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system
or the radar cruise control system (If equipped)
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system;
or,
• The seat belt pretensioner system
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or,
• The brake assist system

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) system

Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor.

(If equipped)

758

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the door(s) are not yet
fully closed.

Make sure that all the
doors are closed.

Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the hood is not yet fully
closed.

Close the hood.

When trouble arises
759

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)
(If equipped)

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the back
door is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h), a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the back door is not yet
fully closed.

Close the back door.

Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off,
and the driver's door
open)

Close the moon roof.

Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h),

Release the parking
brake.

flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still
engaged.
Indicates that the washer
Add washer fluid.
fluid level is low

760

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details
Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
soon.

(U.S.A. only)

Correction procedure

If necessary, perform
maintenance.

Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
after the maintenance
data has been reset.
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*.

(U.S.A. only)

(AWD models)

Indicates that the AWD
system is not currently
functional
A buzzer also sounds.

Reduce vehicle speed or
stop the vehicle in a safe
place until the warnings
clear.
In this case, do not stop
the engine.

761

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

Perform the necessary
Comes on approximately maintenance. Please reset
5000 miles (8000 km) the maintenance data
after the maintenance is
after the maintenance
performed. (P. 657)
data has been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(If equipped)

762

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the precollision system is not
currently functional
because the grille or the
sensor is dirty.
This message also
appears when the precollision system is not
functional due to overheating.

• Check the grille and the
sensor and clean them if
they are dirty.
• In case of overheating,
the system will become
functional once the system cools down.

Indicates that intuitive
parking assist is dirty or
covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
The site of the malfunction and the vehicle
image are flashing.

Clean the sensor.

Indicates that the radar
cruise control sensor is
dirty or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.

Clean the sensor.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(If equipped)

(Flashes)
(If equipped)

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance
A buzzer also sounds.

• Switch driving mode to
normal.
• If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to a mode other
than AUTO (If
equipped) or high speed
wiper operation.

Indicates that there is a
high possibility of a frontal collision, or that the
pre-collision braking
function is operating
A buzzer also sounds.
At the same time,

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

will appear on
the head-up display (the
image flashes).

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

will appear on
the head-up display (the
image flashes).

763

When trouble arises

(Flashes)
(If equipped)

Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in radar cruise
mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
At the same time,

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

764

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the engine
has overheated
A buzzer also sounds.

Stop and check.
(P. 799)

Indicates that remaining
fuel is approximately 2.8
gal. (10.7 L, 2.3 Imp. gal.)
or less

Refuel the vehicle.

Indicates that the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY Turn the lights off.
mode and the driver's
door is opened while the
lights are turned on.
Indicates that the Blind
Spot Monitor sensors or
the surrounding area on
the bumper is dirty or
covered with ice.

Clean the sensor and its
surrounding area on the
bumper.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.

Stop the vehicle in a safe
place, shift the shift lever
to “P” and wait until the
light goes off.
If the light goes off, you
may start the vehicle
again. If the light does
not go off, contact your
Lexus dealer.

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner's Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

When trouble arises
765

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message and light go off.
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Sounds
once

Warning message


(Flashes)

Correction
procedure

The electronic key
Confirm the locais not detected
when an attempt tion of the elecis made to start
tronic key.
the engine.
The electronic key
was carried outside the vehicle
and a door other
than the driver's
Bring the elecdoor was opened
tronic key back
and closed while
into the vehicle.
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was in a
mode other than
off.

Sounds Sounds
once 3 times
(Flashes)

766

Details

The driver's door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was
in P and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.

Turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
or bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Warning message

Sounds Sounds
once once
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)

Sounds
once


(Flashes)

Details

Correction
procedure

An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key and
lock the doors
without first turning the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch off.

Turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
and lock the
doors again.

767

When trouble arises

An attempt was
made to start the
engine without
the electronic key
being present, or
the electronic key Confirm that the
was not function- electronic key is
ing normally.
inside the vehicle.
An attempt was
made to drive
when the regular
key was not inside
the vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Continuous

Warning message


(Flashes)

Con- Continuous tinuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)

768

Details

Correction
procedure

The driver’s door
was opened when
the shift lever was
Shift the shift lever
not in P and the
to P.
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
The driver's door
was opened and
closed while the
• Shift the shift
electronic key was
lever to P.
not in the vehicle,
• Bring the electhe shift lever was
tronic key back
not in P and the
“ENGINE START into the vehicle.
STOP” switch was
not turned off.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Warning message

Details

Correction
procedure

An attempt was
made to lock the
doors using the
smart access system with pushbutton start while
the electronic key
was still inside the
vehicle.
Sounds Cononce tinuous
(Flashes)

Retrieve the electronic key from
the vehicle and
lock the doors
again.

When trouble arises

An attempt was
made to lock
either front door
by opening a door
and putting the
inside lock button
into the lock position, then closing
the door by pulling on the outside
door handle with
the electronic key
still inside the
vehicle.

769

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Sounds
once

Warning message


(Flashes)

Sounds
once


(Flashes)

770

Details

Correction
procedure

• When the doors
were unlocked
with the
mechanical key
and then the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
pressed, the
electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected in the
vehicle even
after the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
pressed two
consecutive
times.

Touch the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while depressing
the brake pedal.

An attempt was
made to start the Shift the shift lever
to P and start the
engine with the
shift lever in an
engine.
incorrect position.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Sounds
once

Warning message


(Flashes)



Correction
procedure

An attempt was
made to turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
when the shift
lever was not in P.

To turn off the
engine, first shift
the shift lever to P
and then turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.



Next time when
starting the
engine, increase
Power was turned the engine speed
slightly and mainoff due to the
automatic power tain that level for
off function.
approximately 5
minutes to
recharge the battery.



Replace the elecThe electronic key
tronic key battery.
has a low battery.
(P. 701)

771

When trouble arises

Sounds
once

Details

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Sounds
once

Warning message


(Flashes)

772

Details

Correction
procedure

The driver's door
was opened and
closed with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
turned off and
then the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
put in ACCESSORY mode
twice without the
engine being
started.

Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while depressing
the brake pedal.

During an engine
starting procedure in the event
that the electronic key was not
functioning properly (P. 794),
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
touched with the
electronic key.

Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
within 10 seconds
of the buzzer
sounding.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer

Sounds
once

Details

Correction
procedure

The steering lock
could not be
released within 3
seconds of the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
being pressed.

Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while depressing
the brake pedal
and moving the
steering wheel left
and right.

Warning message


(Flashes)

■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)

In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicleto-vehicle distance decreases:
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the

vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed

When trouble arises
773

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with
the spare tire.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.

774

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Spare tire
cover

Jack handle
Wheel nut
wrench
Tool bag
Towing eyelet

Jack

Spare tire

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Jack handle
Wheel nut
wrench
Tool bag
Towing eyelet

Spare tire
cover
5

When trouble arises

Jack

Spare tire

775

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
STEP 1

Pull the lever upward to fold back
the front part of the deck board.

STEP 2

Pull the folded deck board upright.

STEP 3

Pull on the attached hook to
extend the string.

776

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

Use the hook to secure the deck
board as shown in the illustration.

STEP 5

Remove the jack after removing
the hook.

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
STEP 1

Pull the lever upward to fold back
the front part of the deck board.
5

Pull on the attached hook to
extend the string.

777

When trouble arises

STEP 2

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 3

Use the hook to secure the deck
board as shown in the illustration.

STEP 4

Remove the jack after removing
the hook.

778

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire
Lift up the deck board. (See “Taking out the jack” for details.)
STEP 2 Remove the spare tire cover.
STEP 3 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
STEP 1

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire

When trouble arises
779

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1

Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Lefthand side
Front
Righthand side
Lefthand side
Rear
Righthand side

STEP 2

STEP 3

780

Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.

STEP 5

Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.

When trouble arises
781

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.

STEP 1

If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand
by approximately the same amount.
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
Tapered portion
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.

STEP 2

Disc wheel
seat

Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
Washer

Wheel nut
Disc wheel

782

Turn the nuts until the washers
come into contact with the wheel.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Lower the vehicle.

STEP 3

Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown
in the illustration.

STEP 4

Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

STEP 5

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

When trouble arises

on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
(P. 815)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire
pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

783

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with a

compact spare tire)

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the
following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
STEP 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
STEP 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-

cle.
STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 685)

784

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and

removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.

● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the

jack.

● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.

When trouble arises
785

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:

• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after
the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel
while the vehicle is moving.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door

In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door
main switch (P. 58). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands
and fingers being caught and injured.

786

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use

with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-

tions that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
● ABS & Brake assist
● VSC
● Enhanced VSC (if equipped)
● TRAC
● VDIM (if equipped)
● Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
● Navigation system (if equipped)

● Cruise control (if equipped)
● Pre-Collision System (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may even negatively affect the drive-train components:
● AWD system (if equipped)
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

787

When trouble arises

● Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the

vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

788

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 165), consider each of the following points.

■ The engine will not start, even though the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures. (P. 165)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 110)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 796)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

789

When trouble arises

■ The starter motor does not turn over.
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an
interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 790)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 796)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 3 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
STEP 4 Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about 15
seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1

790

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental
operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4

STEP 5

Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.

Press the shift lock override button.

When trouble arises

The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.

791

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

792

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 42) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and
the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the side doors and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key (P. 31)
in order to perform the following
operations (driver’s door only):
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.

793

When trouble arises

Opens the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the engine
STEP 1
STEP 2

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm will
sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the electronic key.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds of
the buzzer sounding, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 3

794

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 701)
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes

Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 166)

When trouble arises
795

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps
below.
STEP 1

Open the hood. Remove the battery cover. (P. 673)

STEP 2

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on the second vehicle
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal
on the second vehicle
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid,
stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any
moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

796

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
STEP 5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the
engine of your vehicle by turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode.
STEP 6 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP 3

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
● The power back door must be initialized. (P. 847)
● Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing

the battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated.
(P. 114)

■ Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
797

When trouble arises

low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is

not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with

each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the bat-

tery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to

allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-

ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other

battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in
the cooling fans or belt.

798

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

● “ENGINE OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-information display.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
STEP 1
STEP 2

STEP 3

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled down
sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans

STEP 4

The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
Radiator cap

799

When trouble arises

If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Add coolant if necessary.

STEP 5

(P. 671)

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

STEP 6

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check
that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant
leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking
the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

STEP 7

If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the

steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injuries such as burns.

● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans

and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting
in serious injury.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.

800

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additives.

When trouble arises
801

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6

802

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever
to P.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the front
wheels to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
AWD models: Activate all-wheel drive lock mode. (P. 275)
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press the VSC off switch to turn off TRAC.

CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than

necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi-

cle may require towing to be freed.

803

When trouble arises

NOTICE

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.

STEP 2

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N
STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 4 Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
To stop the engine, press and
STEP 4
hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 2 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP 5

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine.

804

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises
805

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

806

Vehicle specifications

6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 806
Fuel information...................... 818
Tire information....................... 821
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 834
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize .................... 847

805

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length

187.8 in. (4770 mm)

Overall width

74.2 in. (1885 mm)

Overall height*

66.3 in. (1685 mm)*2
66.7 in. (1695 mm)*3
67.9 in. (1725 mm)*4

Wheelbase
Tread

107.9 in. (2740 mm)
Front

64.2 in. (1630 mm)

Rear

64.0 in. (1625 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
Trailer Weight Rating
(trailer weight + cargo weight)

*1:
*2 :
*3 :
*4:
*5 :
*6 :

806

885 lb. (400 kg)
2000 lb. (907 kg)*5
3500 lb. (1588 kg)*6

Unladen vehicles
Vehicles without roof antenna and roof rails
Vehicles with roof antenna but without roof rails
Vehicles with roof rails
Without towing package
With towing package

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel. On some models, this number is also stamped under the front passenger seat.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■ Engine number

807

Vehicle specifications

The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.

6-1. Specifications

Engine
Model

2GR-FE

Type

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.70 3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)

Displacement

210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Fuel
Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating

87 (Research octane number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 Imp. gal.)

808

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference*)
With filter

6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)

Without filter

6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Vehicle specifications
809

6-1. Specifications

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.

Outside temperature

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced with
SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.

810

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system
Without towing pack9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp. qt.)
Capacity age
With towing package 10.0 qt. (9.5 L, 8.4 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• A similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap

DENSO FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Vehicle specifications
811

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):

12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the engine and
all the lights are turned off)

Charging rates

5 A max.

Automatic transaxle
6-speed models
Fluid capacity*

2WD

6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)

AWD

7.1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.

8-speed models
Fluid capacity*

7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may
cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by
vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

812

6-1. Specifications

Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity

0.8 qt. (0.8 L, 0.7 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent oil of matching quality that satisfies the above specifications. Please
contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Rear differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity

0.5 qt. (0.5 L, 0.4 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity*

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

Vehicle specifications
813

6-1. Specifications

Brakes
Pedal clearance*1

3.5 in. (88 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

0.04  0.24 in. (1  6 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel*2

7  10 clicks

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51
kgf) while the engine is running

*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.5 lbf (300 N, 31
kgf)

Steering
Free play

814

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

6-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size

P235/60R18 102V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)

Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size

18  7 1/2J, 18  4T (spare)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Type B
Tire size

P235/60R18 102V

Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
18  7 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Vehicle specifications

Wheel size

815

6-1. Specifications

Type C
Tire size

P235/55R19 101V, T165/90D18 107M (spare)

Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
*: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160
km/h), in countries where such speeds are permitted
by law, add 1 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
front tires, 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

19  7 1/2J, 18  4T (spare)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Type D
Tire size

P235/55R19 101V

Tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)

Driving under normal conditions
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
When driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h),
in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add
1 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front tires, 3 psi
(20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear tires. Never
exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size

19  7 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

816

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs
Light bulbs

Bulb No.

Type

9005



60
55
35

A
B
C

7444NA

28/8

Tail lights



Front fog lights (halogen bulbs)*



Rear side marker lights



Rear turn signal lights



Back-up lights

921

Outer foot lights



Vanity lights



Front interior lights



Rear interior lights



Luggage compartment lights



Door courtesy lights



Footwell lights



3.8

Headlights
High beam
Low beam (halogen bulbs)*
Low beam (discharge bulbs)*
Front turn signal lights
Exterior

Interior

HB3 halogen bulbs
D4S discharge bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
If equipped

B: H11 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
F: H16 halogen bulbs

Vehicle specifications

A:
C:
E:
*:

817

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating

or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission

levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and

customer satisfaction through better performance.

818

6-1. Specifications

■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to

avoid build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean

and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.

● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more

information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to
the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol.
(30% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)

● Use only gasoline containing up to 15%

ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E30, E50, E85 (which are only some
examples of fuel containing more than
15% ethanol).

than 87.

● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

819

Vehicle specifications

● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower

6-1. Specifications

■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be dam-

aged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated

here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

820

6-1. Specifications

Tire information
Typical tire symbols

Standard tire

Compact spare tire

Vehicle specifications

Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators

(P. 824)
(P. 823)
(P. 684)

821

6-1. Specifications

Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is
a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(P. 688)
(P. 815)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

Summer tire or all season tire

(P. 688)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

(P. 783)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

822

6-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that

the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.

Vehicle specifications
823

6-1. Specifications

Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter

824

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

825

Vehicle specifications

■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

826

6-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Vehicle specifications
827

6-1. Specifications

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation
pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle
weight

The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

828

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below

Production options
weight

The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Weather side

The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire

829

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle normal load on
the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass

830

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible
inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated

Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Vehicle specifications

831

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall

Test rim

832

)

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators
(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing

*: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat

11 through 15

16 through 20

833

Vehicle specifications

Designated seating
capacity,
Number of occupants

6-2. Customization

Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. Programming of these preferences can be
performed by your Lexus dealer.
It is also possible to customize certain vehicle features yourself using the
multi-information switches, the navigation system screen or the Display
Audio system screen.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Customizing vehicle features
It is possible to customize certain vehicle features using the multi-information switches. *
*: For instructions on customizing vehicle features using the navigation
system screen, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
For instructions on customizing vehicle features using the Display
Audio system screen: P. 337
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a
safe place with the shift lever in P and the parking brake set.
STEP 1

834

Press and hold the menu switch of
the multi-information switches to
display customize mode.

6-2. Customization

STEP 2

STEP 3

Press the “” or “” switch to
select the item to be customized.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
confirm.

Press the “” or “” switch to
select the desired setting for the
item being customized.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
confirm.

When customization is completed, press the menu switch to clear the
customization screen.

Vehicle specifications
835

6-2. Customization

Customizable Features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed
using the Display Audio system
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed
using the multi-information switches
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using
the screen of the navigation system
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using
the multi-information switches
Vehicles without a Display Audio system and navigation system: Settings that can be changed using the multi-information switches
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

836

6-2. Customization

Door lock (P. 52, 793)
Function

Unlocking using a
key

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Driver's
door
unlocked
All doors
in one step,
unlocked
all doors
in one step
unlocked
in two
steps

—

Speed-detecting
automatic door lock
function

Off

—

Shifting gears to
position other than
P locks all doors

Off

—

Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors

Off

—

Opening driver's
door unlocks all
doors

Off

—

Vehicle specifications
837

6-2. Customization

Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control
(P. 35, 49)
Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Operation buzzer
volume

Level 7

Off to level
6

—

Operation signal
(buzzer)

Off

—

Operation signal
(emergency flashers)

Off

—

Open door warning
buzzer

Off

—

Driver’s
door

30 seconds
120 seconds
All the
doors

—

Off

—

Time elapsed before
the automatic door
lock function is activated if a door is not
opened after being
unlocked
Smart door unlocking
Smart access system with push-button start

838

Off
60 seconds

6-2. Customization

Power back door (P. 57)
Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Power back door
opening operation
using the back door
opener button

Off

—

Wireless remote control (P. 49)
Function

Unlocking operation

Panic function

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Driver's
door
unlocked
All doors
in one step,
unlocked
all doors
in one step
unlocked
in two
steps
On

Off

Vehicle specifications
839

6-2. Customization

Automatic light control system (P. 211)
Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting
Off

Time elapsed before
the headlights turn
off

30 seconds

60 seconds
90 seconds

—

Light sensor sensitivity

Standard

-2 to 2

—

Light reminder
buzzer

Off

—

Daytime running
light system (except
for Canada)

Off

—

840

6-2. Customization

Illumination(P. 595)
Function

Default
setting

Time elapsed before
15 seconds
the interior lights
turn off
Time elapsed before
15 seconds
the exterior lights
turn off

Customized
setting
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds

—

Off

—

Operation after the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
turned off

Off

—

Operation when
you approach the
vehicle with the
electronic key on
your person

Off

—

Wireless remote
control linked exterior lights when the
surrounding area is
dark

Off

—

841

Vehicle specifications

Operation when the
doors are unlocked

6-2. Customization

Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Interior light control

Off

—

Exterior light control

Off

—

Shift lever lights

Off

—

Seat belt reminder (P. 747)
Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer

Off

Automatic air conditioning system (P. 345, 353)
Function
A/C auto switch
operation
Exhaust gas sensor
sensitivity

842

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Auto

Manual

—

Standard

-3 to 3

—

6-2. Customization

Driving position memory (P. 76)
Function
Driver’s seat movement when exiting
the vehicle (on some
models)
Selecting whether
the driver’s door or
all doors are linked
to the power easy
access system

Default
setting

Customized
setting
Off

Full

—

Partial

Driver’s
door

All the
doors

Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Eco Driving Indicator Light

Off

Meter (P. 156)

Vehicle specifications
843

6-2. Customization

Power windows (P. 98)
Default
setting

Customized
setting

Mechanical key
linked operation

Off

—

Wireless remote
control linked opening

Off

—

Wireless remote
control linked opening buzzer

Off

—

Default
setting

Customized
setting

Mechanical key
linked operation

Off

—

Wireless remote
control linked opening

Off

—

Linked operation of
components when
door key is used

Slide only

Tilt only

—

Linked operation of
components when
wireless remote
control is used

Slide only

Tilt only

—

Function

Moon roof (P. 101)
Function

844

6-2. Customization

Turn signal lever (P. 187)
Function

Default
setting

Customized
setting
5

Times of flashing of
the lane change signal flashers

7
3

—

11
Off

Intuitive parking assist (P. 245)
Customized
setting

1 to 5

—

Detection distance
of the front center
sensors

Far

Near

—

Detection distance
of the rear center
sensors

Far

Near

—

Function
Buzzer volume

Display setting
(when intuitive park- All sensors No sensors
ing assist is operat- displayed displayed
ing)

845

Vehicle specifications

Default
setting

6-2. Customization

Multi-information display (P. 200)
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information switches
Available languages
Available units

English, French and Spanish
miles (MPG), km (km/L), km (L/100 km)

■ In the following situations, customize mode will automatically be turned off.
● A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is displayed.
● The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.
● The vehicle begins to move while the customize mode screen is displayed.

CAUTION
■ Cautions during customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE
■ During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing
features.

846

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.

Item

When to initialize

Reference

Power back door

• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse

P. 56

Maintenance data
(U.S.A. only)

After the maintenance is performed

P. 657

Tire pressure warning
system

• When rotating the tires
• When changing tire pressure (such
as when changing traveling speed,
load weight, etc.)
• When changing the tire size

P. 685

Vehicle specifications
847

6-3. Initialization

848

For owners

7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 850
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 851
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 853
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 863

849

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

850

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.

For owners
851

Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.

ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité

Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.

852

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions
in English.

Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/le coussin gonflable du
passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de
l’habitacle
Coussins gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant

For owners
853

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideaux
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des passagers avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des passagers dans les sièges
arrière extérieurs
Coussins gonflables SRS rideaux
● Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures
● Peuvent contribuer à empêcher les occupants d'être éjectés du
véhicule en cas de tonneau

854

Composition du système de coussin gonflable SRS

Commutateur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
conducteur
Capteur de position du siège
conducteur
Capteur de coussin gonflable
Capteurs de coussin gonflable
frontal
Commutateur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité du
passager avant
Capteurs de porte
Prétensionneurs de ceintures
de sécurité et limiteurs de
force

For owners

Coussins gonflables de genoux
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
Coussins gonflables rideaux
Coussins gonflables latéraux
avant
Système de classification de
l’occupant du siège passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG
ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussins gonflables latéraux
arrière
Témoin d’avertissement SRS
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Capteurs
de
coussins
gonflables rideaux et arrière

855

Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines
applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier
électronique (ECU) des coussins gonflables régule le déploiement de
ces derniers sur la base des informations qu’il reçoit des capteurs, etc.,
indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système.
Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l’occupation du
véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins
gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction chimique dans les
dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant
d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.

856

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS

Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les coussins gonflables SRS.
Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur

ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec
les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable,

qui peut être très dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le conducteur se trouve très près
du coussin gonflable . L’autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux
États-Unis, la “NHTSA” (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration)
conseille:
La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à
3 in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, placez-vous à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre
coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante.
Cette distance est à mesurer entre l’axe du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis
à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de
plusieurs façons:

857

For owners

• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre
confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart
des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même
avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un
peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir
incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous
rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège,
remontez-le.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d’orienter
le coussins gonflables en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête
et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le
contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture

de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de
sécurité avant, mais pas au pêne de la
ceinture de sécurité, les coussins
gonflables SRS frontaux détectent que le
conducteur et le passager avant ont
attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, alors
même que ce n’est pas le cas. Dans ce cas,
il se peut que les coussins gonflables SRS
frontaux ne se déploient pas correctement
en cas d’accident et vous risquez d’être tué
ou grièvement blessé. Veillez à porter la
ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une

violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le
passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Éloignez le siège
passager avant au maximum du coussin gonflable et réglez le dossier de siège de
façon à être assis bien droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés

peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d’un coussin
gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour
pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Lexus recommande vivement d’installer
tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir
pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour
les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant.
● N’installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège du

passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas
d’accident, la force de déploiement rapide du coussins gonflables du passager
avant peut grièvement, voire mortellement blesser l’enfant si le siège de sécurité
enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège du passager avant.

858

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et

ne vous appuyez pas contre le tableau de
bord.

● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout

devant le coussin gonflable SRS passager
avant ou bien s’asseoir sur les genoux du
passager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges

avant voyager avec un objet sur les
genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,

contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller sur les

sièges passagers en appui contre la porte
ou sortir la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du
véhicule.
7

For owners
859

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne rien fixer ou appuyer contre les zones

telles que le tableau de bord, le volant ou
des zones inférieures du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments pourraient devenir des
projectiles dans le cas du déploiement des
coussins gonflables du conducteur SRS,
passager avant et genoux.
● Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre du pare-

brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants
avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la
poignée d’assistance.
● Ne suspendez aucun cintre nu ni objet dur

aux crochets à vêtements. En cas de
déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS
rideaux, tous ces objets pourraient se
transformer en projectiles et causer des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Si un cache en vinyle est mis dans la zone où les coussins gonflables SRS de

genoux se déploie, assurez-vous de l’enlever.
● N’utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement

des coussins gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d’en gêner le déploiement.
De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de
fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement
accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, ce qui pourrait entraîner la mort ou
des blessures graves.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant

les composants des coussins gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des coussins
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déploiement

(gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.

860

ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonflables SRS
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins

gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture du

moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent
abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
● Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple.

Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du
siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager.
En conséquence, le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant risque de ne pas se
déployer en cas de choc.

For owners
861

ATTENTION
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de coussin gonflable SRS

Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin
d’intervenir sur votre véhicule, de vous en séparer ou de procéder à l’une des
modifications suivantes.
Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se
déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau

de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garniture, des montants
avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs

de l’habitacle
● Installation d’un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de

chasse-neiges ou de treuils
● Modifications des suspensions du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels que radio émetteur/récepteur ou

lecteurs CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne

atteinte d’un handicap physique

862

Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the
headlight aim section in this manual.

■ Dépose des habillages du compartiment moteur
Extérieur

Avant

For owners
863

■ Vis de réglage dans l'axe vertical
Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à halogène
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B

Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à décharge
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B

■ Avant de vérifier le réglage du faisceau des phares
ÉTAPE 1 Vérifiez que le réservoir de carburant du véhicule est plein et
que la carrosserie autour des projecteurs n'a pas subi de choc
suffisant pour la déformer.
ÉTAPE 2 Stationnez le véhicule bien à plat.
ÉTAPE 3 Installez-vous dans le siège conducteur.
ÉTAPE 4 Donnez plusieurs impulsions à la carrosserie du véhicule de
manière à comprimer/détendre les suspensions.

864

■ Réglage du faisceau des phares
Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à halogène
Tournez la vis A dans l'un ou
ÉTAPE 1
l'autre sens au moyen d'un
tournevis
cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Mémorisez le sens dans lequel
vous avez tourné et le nombre
de tours.
ÉTAPE 2

Tournez la vis B du même
nombre de tours et dans le
même sens qu'à l'étape 1, avec
un
tournevis
cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Si vous n'arrivez pas à régler le
projecteur en procédant de la
sorte, confiez votre véhicule à
votre concessionnaire Lexus
pour qu'il règle le faisceau des
phares.

For owners
865

Véhicules équipés de projecteurs à décharge
Tournez la vis A dans l'un ou
ÉTAPE 1
l'autre sens au moyen d'un
tournevis
cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Mémorisez le sens dans lequel
vous avez tourné et le nombre
de tours.
ÉTAPE 2

Tournez la vis B du même
nombre de tours dans le même
sens qu'en étape 1 au moyen
d'un tournevis cruciforme
(empreinte Phillips).
Si vous n'arrivez pas à régler le
projecteur en procédant de la
sorte, confiez votre véhicule à
votre concessionnaire Lexus
pour qu'il règle le faisceau des
phares.

866

Index
Abbreviation list .................... 868
Alphabetical index................. 870
What to do if... ....................... 882

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual” for information regarding
the equipment listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Navigation system
Air conditioning controls
Windshield wiper de-icer
Rear view monitor system
Intuitive parking assist
Audio/video system
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogging

867

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING

2WD

2 Wheel Drive

4WD

4 Wheel Drive

A/C

Air Conditioning

ABS

Anti-lock Brake System

AI-SHIFT

Artificial Intelligence Shift control

ALR

Automatic Locking Retractor

AWD

All Wheel Drive

BSM

Blind Spot Monitor

CRS

Child Restraint System

DISP

Display

ECO

Economy/Ecology

ECT

Electronic Controlled Transmission

ECU

Electronic Control Unit

EDR

Event Data Recorder

ELR

Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS

Electric Power Steering

GAWR

Gross Axle Weight Ratings

GCWR

Gross Combination Weight Rating

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M

Emission Inspection and Maintenance

LATCH

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED

Light Emitting Diode

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

M+S

Mud and Snow

MTBE

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

868

Abbreviation list

ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING

OBD

On Board Diagnostics

PCS

Pre-Collision System

PWR

Power

Radio Frequency

SRS

Supplemental Restraint System

TIN

Tire Identification Number

TPMS

Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC

Traction Control

TWR

Trailer Weight Rating

VDIM

Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management

VIN

Vehicle Identification Number

VSC

Vehicle Stability Control

869

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index
A A/C*
Air conditioning filter .......................699
Automatic air conditioning
system*....................................345, 353
ABS.............................................................269
ACCESSORY mode .......................... 165
Active torque control
AWD mode .........................................269
Air conditioning system*
Air conditioning filter .......................699
Automatic air conditioning
system*....................................345, 353
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.......... 122
Airbag precautions for your
child......................................................... 127
Airbag warning light ........................ 745
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions.............................................123
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ......................................... 127
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................132
General airbag precautions .......... 127
Locations of airbags............................ 119
Modification and disposal of
airbags.....................................................131
Proper driving posture .............117, 127
Side airbag operating
conditions.............................................123
Side airbag precautions ................... 127
SRS airbags ............................................. 119

870

Alarm............................................................ 112
All-wheel drive lock switch .............. 275
Antenna........................................380, 489
Anti-lock brake system...................... 269
Armrest .................................................... 622
Assist grips .............................................. 624
Audio input* ................................. 412, 554
Audio system*
Antenna..................................................489
Audio input........................................... 554
AUX port.............................................. 554
Bluetooth® audio system.............530
CD player/changer..........................492
Hands-free system for mobile
phone...................................................560
iPod ............................................................510
MP3/WMA disc.................................501
Optimal use ......................................... 552
Portable audio device..................... 554
Radio ....................................................... 483
Steering wheel audio switch........556
USB memory ...................................... 520
USB port .................................... 510, 520

Alphabetical index

Audio system
(Lexus Display Audio system)
Antenna..................................................380
Audio input............................................. 412
AUX port ................................................ 412
Bluetooth® audio system ............... 414
CD player .............................................383
Hands-free system for mobile
phone................................................... 433
iPod .......................................................... 394
MP3/WMA disc...............................384
Optimal use.......................................... 428
Portable audio device....................... 412
Radio ......................................................368
Steering wheel audio switch........430
USB memory ...................................... 402
USB port....................................394, 402
Automatic air conditioning system*
Air conditioning filter .......................699
Automatic air conditioning
system* ...................................345, 353
Automatic headlight leveling
system...................................................... 214
Automatic light control system ..........211
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission............171, 178
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................................... 791
M mode....................................................183
S mode ..................................................... 174
AUX port ...................................... 412, 554
Auxiliary boxes .......................... 606, 627

B Back door
Back door.................................................56
Wireless remote control ...................49
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Wattage................................................... 817
Battery
Checking ................................................681
If the vehicle has a discharged
battery ..................................................796
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................302
Blind Spot Monitor...............................286
Bluetooth® audio* .....................414, 530
Bluetooth® phone* .................433, 560
Bottle holders........................................ 600
Brake
Fluid............................................................ 814
Parking brake .......................................189
Brake assist..............................................269
Break-in tips............................................. 155
BSM............................................................286

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
871

Alphabetical index

C Card key......................................................30
Care
Exterior .................................................. 650
Interior.....................................................653
Seat belts................................................654
Cargo capacity.......................................301
Cargo hooks........................................... 627
CD changer
CD ................................................383, 492
MP3 ..............................................384, 501
WMA disc..................................384, 501
CD player ....................................383, 492
Chains .......................................................302
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition...................137
Booster seats, installation ..................141
Convertible seats, definition ..........137
Convertible seats, installation..........141
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................132
Infant seats, definition.........................137
Infant seats, installation........................141
Installing CRS with LATCH
system....................................................142
Installing CRS with seat belts.........144
Installing CRS with top tether
straps..................................................... 148
Child safety
Airbag precautions............................. 127
Back door precautions...................... 62
Battery
precautions ...........................682, 796
Child restraint system........................137
Child-protectors................................... 53
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................................85
872

Installing child restraints.....................141
Moon roof precautions....................104
Power window lock switch ............. 98
Power window precautions...........100
Removed electronic key battery
precautions........................................702
Seat belt extender precautions..... 89
Seat belt precautions.......................... 86
Seat heater precautions................... 621
Child-protectors...................................... 53
Cleaning
Exterior...................................................650
Interior..................................................... 653
Seat belts ............................................... 654
Clock*.......................................................... 611
Coat hooks.............................................. 623
Coin holder.............................................606
Compass..................................................638
Condenser .............................................. 678
Console box ...........................................604
Coolant
Engine coolant.....................................677
Cooling system
Engine overheating.......................... 799
Cornering assist sensors................... 245
Cruise control
Cruise control......................................227
Dynamic radar cruise control......232
Cup holders............................................. 601
Curtain shield airbags ........................... 119
Customizable features.......................834

Alphabetical index

D Daytime running light system............213
Defogger*
Rear window..........................................361
Side mirrors............................................361
Dimensions .............................................806
Dinghy towing ....................................... 323
Display
Multi-information display...............200
Trip information.................................. 203
Warning message ............................ 754
Do-it-yourself maintenance..............664
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights ........................595
Wattage ...................................................817
Door lock
Back door ................................................ 56
Side door...................................................52
Wireless remote control....................49
Door pockets.........................................600
Doors
Back door ................................................ 56
Door lock ................................35, 49, 52
Door windows....................................... 98
Power back door ................................. 56
Side door...................................................52
Side mirrors............................................. 95
Driver's seat belt reminder light .....747
Driving
Break-in tips...........................................155
Correct posture.....................................117
Procedures.............................................154
Utility vehicle
precautions ........................................292
Winter driving tips ............................ 302
Driving position memory ......................76

E Electric power steering......................269
Electronic features control .............. 200
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................793
Emergency flashers
Switch.......................................................734
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds...........744
If a warning light turns on...............744
If a warning message is
displayed.............................................754
If the back door opener is
inoperative ..............................................61
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................793
If the engine will not start............... 789
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................................791
If the vehicle has a discharged
battery ..................................................796
If you have a flat tire ......................... 774
If you lose your keys.........................792
If you think something is
wrong ................................................... 742
If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 802
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.........804
If your vehicle needs to be
towed....................................................735
If your vehicle overheats ................799

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
873

Alphabetical index

Engine
Accessory mode ................................ 165
Compartment .....................................670
Engine switch........................................ 165
Hood........................................................667
How to start the engine................... 165
Identification number.......................807
If the engine will not start ...............789
Ignition switch....................................... 165
Overheating.........................................799
Engine compartment cover ...............671
Engine coolant
Capacity.................................................... 811
Checking ............................................... 677
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................302
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.........................................................191
Engine immobilizer system..................110
Engine oil
Capacity................................................ 809
Checking ............................................... 674
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................302
EPS .............................................................269
Event data recorder ...............................26

874

Floor mat.................................................. 625
Fluid
Brake .........................................................814
Washer...................................................683
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Switch........................................................ 215
Wattage ................................................... 817
Footwell light ..........................................595
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Switch........................................................ 215
Wattage ................................................... 817
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........................132
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light ......................................747
Front seats
Adjustment .............................................. 68
Driving position memory ..................76
Flattening seatbacks ............................69
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Wattage ................................................... 817

Alphabetical index

Head-up display main switch..... 206
Heaters
Seat heaters ......................................... 620
Side mirrors*......................................... 361
Steering wheel...................................... 619
Hill-start assist control ........................ 276
Hood .......................................................... 667
Hooks
Cargo ......................................................627
Coat..........................................................623
Horn ............................................................190
HUD
Display contrast adjustment
switch................................................... 206
Display position adjustment
switch................................................... 206
Head-up display main switch..... 206

Fuel
Capacity................................................ 808
Fuel gauge ................................................191
Fuel pump shut off system .............743
Information............................................. 818
Refueling ................................................. 105
Type........................................................... 818
Fuel door....................................................105
Fuel filler door..........................................105
Fuel pump shut off system .................743
Fuses.......................................................... 703

G Garage door opener...........................632
Gauges........................................................ 191
Glove box ............................................... 599
H Hands-free system for
mobile phone* ........................433, 560
Hazard lights
Switch ......................................................734
Head restraints
Adjustment ...............................................81
Headlight aim .......................................... 717
Headlight cleaner .................................226
Headlights
Discharge headlight
precautions ........................................732
Replacing light bulbs ......................... 719
Switch..........................................................211
Wattage ...................................................817
Head-up display
Display contrast adjustment
switch ...................................................206
Display position adjustment
switch ...................................................206

I/M test......................................................663
Identification
Engine..................................................... 807
Vehicle ................................................... 807
Ignition switch.......................................... 165
Illuminated entry system ....................595
Immobilizer system.................................110
Indicator lights......................................... 194
Initialization
Items to initialize .................................847
Inside rear view mirror .......................... 92
Instrument panel light control
buttons .................................................... 192

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
875

Alphabetical index

Interior lights
Interior lights.........................................595
Switch ......................................................596
Wattage....................................................817
iPod* ............................................... 394, 510

Jack
Positioning a floor jack................... 668
Vehicle-equipped jack ....................774
Jack handle.............................................. 774

K Keyless entry..............................................49
Keys
Electronic key.........................................30
Engine switch........................................ 165
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ............................ 793
If you lose your keys......................... 792
Key number.............................................30
Keyless entry........................................... 49
Keys.............................................................30
Mechanical key........................................ 31
Wireless remote control key.......... 49
L

876

Lexus Display Audio controller......328
Lexus Display Audio system ............328
Lexus Enform with
Safety Connect*
Light bulbs
Replacing.................................................719
Wattage....................................................817

Lights
Door courtesy lights ........................595
Emergency flasher switch..............734
Fog light switch .................................... 215
Hazard light switch ...........................734
Headlight switch.................................... 211
Interior light switch ...........................596
Luggage compartment light .......... 59
Outer foot lights.................................595
Overhead courtesy light ...............595
Personal light switch........................596
Replacing light bulbs......................... 719
Scuff lights.............................................595
Shift lever light.....................................595
Turn signal lever................................... 187
Vanity lights............................................610
Wattage ................................................... 817
Load capacity.......................................... 301
Lock steering column .......................... 168
Luggage compartment lights
Switch......................................................... 59
Wattage ................................................... 817
Luggage cover ...................................... 629
M Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 664
General maintenance.....................659
Maintenance data .............................806
Maintenance requirements..........656
Meter
Instrument panel light control....... 192
Meters.........................................................191

Alphabetical index

Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......................92
Side mirror heaters* ..........................361
Side mirrors............................................. 95
Vanity mirrors .......................................610
Mobile Assistant*................................. 343
Moon roof .................................................. 101
MP3 disc* .....................................384, 501
Multi-display light control...................615
Multi-information display
Switches .................................................200
Trip information.................................. 203

Paddle shift switches .................... 171, 178
Parking assist sensors*.......................245
Parking brake..........................................189
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Switch.......................................................... 211
PCS
Function ..................................................278
Pre-collision braking off
switch....................................................279
Warning light .......................................745
Personal lights
Switch...................................................... 596
Phone* .......................................... 433, 565
Power back door .....................................56
Power easy access system ..................78
Power outlet............................................. 616
Power windows ........................................98
Pre-collision system
Function ..................................................278
Pre-collision braking off
switch....................................................279
Warning light .......................................745

Radar cruise control............................232
Radiator ....................................................678
Radio*............................................368, 483
Rear seat entertainment system*
Rear seats
Folding down.......................................... 72
Seat adjustment ..................................... 72
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Wattage................................................... 817

N Noise from under vehicle.....................23
O Odometer.................................................. 191

Oil
Engine oil............................................... 674
Opener
Back door ................................................ 56
Fuel filler door ...................................... 105
Hood ....................................................... 667
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights.................................595
Wattage ...................................................817
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding ......................... 95
Mirror position memory ....................76
Outside temperature display*..........613
Overhead console .............................. 606
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights .............595
Wattage ...................................................817
Overheating, Engine ...........................799

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
877

Alphabetical index

Rear view mirror
Compass ...............................................638
Inside rear view mirror....................... 92
Outside rear view mirrors ...............95
Rear view monitor
system* ...................................... 255, 264
Rear window defogger* ..................... 361
Rear window wiper ..............................224
Remote Touch*
Replacing
Electronic key battery........................701
Fuses ........................................................703
Light bulbs...............................................719
Tires...........................................................774
Wireless remote control
battery....................................................701
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners......................................... 850
Reset the maintenance data.............657
Roof luggage carrier...........................296
S

878

Safety Connect*....................................642
Scuff lights................................................595
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................84
Automatic locking retractor............85
Child restraint system
installation ..............................................141
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts.....................................654
Emergency locking retractor ........85
How to wear your seat belt.............83
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................................85

Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use .........................87
Reminder light......................................747
Seat belt extender................................ 86
Seat belt pretensioners ..................... 84
Seat heaters............................................620
Seat position memory.............................76
Seat ventilators......................................620
Seating capacity..................................... 301
Seats
Adjustment .....................................68, 72
Adjustment
precautions.................................... 71, 74
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............................141
Cleaning ................................................ 653
Flatting seat backs ................................69
Head restraint .......................................... 81
Power easy access system ..............78
Properly sitting in the seat................. 117
Seat heaters ......................................... 620
Seat position memory.........................76
Seat ventilators ................................... 620
Service reminder indicators .............194
Shift lever
Automatic transmission ...........171, 178
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................................... 791
Shift lever light .......................................595
Shift lock system......................................791
Side airbags ............................................... 119
Side marker lights
Switch.......................................................... 211
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding......................... 95
Mirror position memory....................76

Alphabetical index

Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ......................................... 35
Starting the engine..............................165
“SOS” button ..........................................642
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ................................ 815
Storage location..................................774
Spark plug .................................................. 811
Specifications.........................................806
Speedometer............................................ 191
Steering
Column lock release .........................168
Steering wheel
Adjustment .............................................. 90
Audio switches*.................... 430, 556
Heated steering wheel .....................619
Power easy access system.............. 78
Steering wheel position
memory ..................................................76
Storage feature..................................... 598
Stuck vehicle
If your vehicle becomes stuck ....802
Sun visors................................................. 609
Sunshades .................................................102
Switch
Display contrast adjustment
switch ...................................................206
Display position adjustment
switch ...................................................206
ECT SNOW switch............... 173, 180
Emergency flasher switch..............734
Engine switch ........................................165
ENTER switch.....................................200
Fog light switch.....................................215

Hazard light switch ...........................734
Head-up display main switch..... 206
Heated steering wheel switch...... 619
Ignition switch....................................... 165
Light switches ......................................... 211
Menu switch ........................................ 200
Paddle shift switches .................171, 178
Power back door switch...................56
Power door lock switch ....................52
Power window switch ........................98
Pre-collision braking off
switch....................................................279
Rear window wiper and
washer switch................................... 224
Window lock switch............................98
Wiper and washer switch................217
T

Tachometer................................................191
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Switch.......................................................... 211
Wattage................................................... 817
Talk switch* ................................. 433, 566
Telephone*.................................. 433, 565
Telephone switch*.................... 433, 566
Theft deterrent system
Alarm........................................................... 112
Immobilizer system..............................110
Theft prevention labels..........................116
Tire inflation pressure .........................693
Tire information
Glossary................................................ 828
Size............................................................824
Tire identification number..............823
Uniform tire quality grading ........ 825

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
879

Alphabetical index

Tires
Chains .....................................................302
Checking ...............................................684
If you have a flat tire...........................774
Inflation pressure................................693
Inflation pressure sensor............... 685
Information..............................................821
Replacing................................................774
Rotating tires ........................................684
Size ............................................................ 815
Snow tires..............................................302
Spare tire.................................................774
Tire pressure warning
system......................................684, 747
Tools........................................................... 774
Total load capacity ................................301
Towing
Dinghy towing..................................... 323
Emergency towing ...........................735
Trailer towing.......................................306
TRAC.........................................................269
Traction control.....................................269
Trailer towing..........................................306
Trip information display..................... 200
Trip meter ...................................................191
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs..........................719
Switch ........................................................187
Wattage....................................................817

880

Under tray ...............................................608
USB port* .............. 394, 402, 510, 520

Vanity lights
Vanity lights............................................610
Wattage ................................................... 817
Vanity mirrors ......................................... 610
VDIM......................................................... 269
Vehicle data recordings....................... 24
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management ....................................... 269
Vehicle identification number.........807
Vehicle stability control ..................... 269
Voice command switch*........433, 566
Voice command system*....................451
VSC ........................................................... 269

W Warning buzzers

Brake system........................................744
Open door ...........................................747
Seat belt reminder .............................747
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ...................745
Brake assist system ...........................745
Brake system........................................744
Charging system................................744
Electric power steering...................745
Electronic engine control
system...................................................745
Low fuel level........................................747
Low tire pressure ...............................747
Malfunction indicator lamp ...........745
Master warning light.........................747

Alphabetical index

Open door ............................................747
Pre-collision system......................... 745
Pretensioners ...................................... 745
Seat belt reminder light ...................747
Slip indicator ........................................ 745
SRS airbags.......................................... 745
Tire pressure.........................................747
Warning messages
Anti-lock brake system .................. 756
Automatic transmission fluid ....... 759
AWD system...............755, 756, 759
Brake lamp system........................... 756
Brake system....................................... 754
Dynamic radar cruise
control system.....................756, 759
Electric power steering.................. 756
Engine oil maintenance.................. 759
Engine oil pressure........................... 755
Engine overheat................................. 759
Headlight leveling ............................. 756
Hood ....................................................... 759
Intuitive parking assist .........756, 759
Low fuel.................................................. 759
Moon roof............................................. 759
Open door ........................................... 759
Parking brake...................................... 759
Pre-collision system.............756, 759
Smart access system with
push-button start............................ 766
SRS airbags.......................................... 756
Steering lock........................................ 756
Washer fluid......................................... 759

Washer
Checking .............................................. 683
Preparing and checking
before winter ....................................302
Switch.........................................................217
Washing and waxing...........................650
Weight
Cargo capacity....................................301
Load limits ..............................................301
Weight....................................................806
Wheels ...................................................... 697
Window glasses ......................................98
Window lock switch ...............................98
Windows
Power windows.....................................98
Rear window defogger* ................. 361
Washer .....................................................217
Windshield wiper de-icer* ...............363
Windshield wipers..................................217
Wireless remote control.......................49
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery........................ 701
WMA disc* .................................. 384, 501

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
881

What to do if...

What to do if...
A tire punctures

P. 774 If you have a flat tire

P. 789 If the engine will not start

The engine does not start

P. 110

Engine immobilizer system

P. 796 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be
moved out

P. 791

If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P

The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 799 If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood

The key is lost

P. 792 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 796 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

The horn begins to sound

The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand

882

P. 56

Side doors
Back door

P. 112

Alarm

P. 52

P. 802 If the vehicle becomes stuck

What to do if...

A warning light or indicator
light comes on

P. 744

If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...

■Warning lights
Brake system warning light

Malfunction indicator lamp

or
P. 744

P. 745

Driver’s seat belt
reminder light

ABS warning light

or
P. 745

Low fuel level warning light
P. 747

SRS warning light
P. 745

Open door warning light
P. 747

Charging system warning
light
P. 744

P. 747

Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 747
Master warning light
P. 747
Electric power steering system
warning light
P. 745

Pre-collision system
warning light*
P. 745
Tire pressure warning light
P. 747

Slip indicator
P. 745

*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
883

GAS STATION INFORMATION

884

Auxiliary catch lever
P. 667

Fuel filler door
P. 105

Back door opener
P. 56

Hood lock release lever
P. 667

Fuel filler door opener
P. 105

Tire inflation pressure
P. 815

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
 reference)

With filter
Without filter

Engine oil type

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only

P. 808
P. 815
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
6.4 (6,1, 5,4)
6.0 (5,7, 5.0)
P. 809

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Modify Date                     : 2015:02:09 14:17:48-08:00
Create Date                     : 2014:12:19 15:04:48-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2015:02:09 14:17:48-08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:76ff4022-3024-4a86-9544-d92858ecb04c
Instance ID                     : uuid:711387ca-750c-4d73-9a60-7cc97e9249e1
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 886

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexus Owners Manual Pdf OM48D65U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation